Home

Samsung SGH-T999RWATMB User's Manual

image

Contents

1. 137 Removing Music Files 187 Using Google Mail 143 MUSICO o s ce cova am ate areas ev he ee ee 188 Google Talk cece eee eee eens 145 AUIS gl ee ee tnin ear 189 CHAION oauan aaa 145 AllShare Cast Hub 2 sivacuesdeeeeews 194 Google onau 147 T Mobile TV oana 200 Messenger 0ce cence eevee 148 YouTube 0000 cece eae 201 Section 8 Multimedia sssse 149 Section 9 Applications and Assigning the Default Storage Location 149 Development sccssssscssssssesssscsessssseesssseees 202 Using the Camera 0 00008 150 Applications 0 cee ee eee 202 Camera Options 000 151 Access T Mobile c0ceuuae 202 Sharing Pictures cc cee eeee 156 AllShare Play 0 0 0 e eee eee 203 Using the Camcorder 164 AMaZON sg 0vancaadee picsaaecasn ewes 204 CAlGWNGION seas eee awe oo ce ous bose cus 205 Calendar ee ee er 205 Camela lt 2 ence eri on ee ees ek ERS 206 CRAION acca dceare dcc os oe gs aoe ee Ra 206 MOCK ices aaawasa suse E E caus 207 COMMIS 2 5 ct2oncdnehen ee dueeehehennd 207 Downloads ccc eee eee 207 DrOPDOX feck ace ace snake nka Web eee a A bn Be 207 EMV dlllinsectin 4 oo 2 cate o eo 4 agate aeeedeatia arate 209 FID DOGG cnce ante eee ene eee nes Oe 210 GIG os ae E ee ea eee eet 210 Game Hub 22 cnactod ce ckwe dans canescens 210 Gmail ounce P wdew
2. 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt q Add new account Account name idbox k 6 Yahoo 0 C Loading messages Access available accounts and folders Messages 137 or Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Outlook work email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive 3 Tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails 4 Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field Note If selected the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If activated skip to step 6 5 Tap Next Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support 6 Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync from the add new email account screen 138 Note If prompted with an on screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish tap Edit details to continue with a manual update of necessary information 7 When prompted to provide additional detailed information within the Exchange server settings screen enter an updated Domain and confirm your user name and Password information Important Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the Domain user name entry Most servers
3. 122 3 Select the recipients of the new message indicated by a green checkmark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually 4 Tap Done 5 Type your message and tap EXA Send The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Logs Tab on page 88 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Tap Favorites tab Favorites Adding a contact to your favorites list 1 From within the Favorites tab press and select Add to favorites 2 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries you wish to assign as favorites 3 Tap Done to complete the process Section 7 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types e Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages e Email and Gmail Messages Google Talk Google Messenger e ChatON The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s message service The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send and receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages
4. 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a Clear view of the sky and uses more battery power Applications and Development 215 Opening Maps Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth 1 From the Home screen tap HCY Apps gt Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the Maps best imagery available most of which is approximately one to 2 Tap the upper right My location button to find your three years old location on the map with a blinking blue dot Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain 3 Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access with the current map location additional options Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your e Search allows you to search for a place of interest map e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share starting point your location with them e Local provides access to the places menu where you can My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps quickly locate a busin
5. Tap None PIN Lock and Unlock 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Tap Screen lock gt PIN Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password Confirm the PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone Password Lock and Unlock 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Tap Screen lock 3 Tap Password Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Changing Your Settings 297 Samsung Unlock Options Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen gt Lock screen options 2 Tap Lock screen options and choose from e Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen e Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen e Camera quick access provides you with quick access to the camera function from the Lock screen When active in a single motion e Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock screen is active Enabled by default e Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock screen while you are traveling Tap the entry to set your home city This time zone then becom
6. To upload a video on your device to Web storage 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt PAR Gallery 2 Select a folder location ex Camera and touch and hold a video to place a colored border around the selected file 3 Tap ce from the top of the Gallery screen The device then confirms the available storage locations and begin the process of uploading the selected video Sharing Media via AllShare Play to a Target Device Important Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Launch AllShare on the target device such as an Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt D AllShare Play Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature 3 Tap your device name from the Devices list 4 Tap an available category tab Pictures Music Movies Files or Info and select a file e Touch and hold to select multiple files o A file with N in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services servers 5 Tap an available on screen file image or video to place a green check mark alongside it 6 Tap Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming 7 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your devic
7. pe touch and hold and drag across the icons to select Ey al E aoa Fee T E a Settings then select it from the available options 1 From within an active message tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap Input Methods to use the default Voice typing input method to convert your spoken words to on screen text Input Mode Current Mode Send Delete man Indicator Input Options Touch and hold to select from other input Settings methods such as e Handwriting to launch an on screen handwriting area that can be used to convert on screen patterns text to text e Clipboard to launch the device s clipboard area from where you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current message 94 e Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e Abc to use alphabetic characters from the on screen 123 keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays sya e Symbol Numeric n to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays i There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping REPAS Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap to
8. Applications and Development 203 AllShare Cast with This feature functions with an Hub accessory external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV Important You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi Fi and be using an active registered Samsung account prior to using this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 264 For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 20 Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as AllShare Play 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Dy Allshare Play 204 2 If prompted read the on screen message about network charges and tap Yes to continue and return to the main AllShare Play screen Note If the main screen still shows a Sign in box close the application and restart it 3 Tap Start and follow the on screen prompts For more information refer to AllShare Play on page 189 Amazon This mobile application provides a user with access to the online Amazon website 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt eg Amazon 2 Log into the site and follow the on screen instructions Calculator Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplic
9. Messaging S Memo and Wi Fi Direct 5 The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new information Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen lf this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut Understanding Your Device 59 To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 60 Press to go to the Home screen Select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one Tap Apps FE to reveal all your current available applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application Touch and hold the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen a ON SS Press to go to the Home screen Navigate to a screen with an empty area Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Home screen window tap Add to Home screen gt Apps Scroll across the pages and t
10. Press the RESET button on the hub for ONE second until the LED turns BLUE Tap the entry from your device s Allshare Cast screen and confirm connection Important The AllShare Cast Hub is a 1 to 1 connection If a previous device was paired to the Hub and is still connected to the AllShare Cast Hub you can not pair a new device until the first connection is stopped Multimedia 197 e have a new device and the hub is connected but it doesn t show up in my list e Force the hub to disconnect from any previously paired devices Press and hold the RESET button on the back of the hub for about FOUR seconds until the LED begins to blink RED Access your new device s AllShare Cast screen and rescan for the existing hub dongle Press the RESET button on the hub for ONE second until the LED turns BLUE Tap the entry from your clevice s AllShare Cast screen and confirm connection 198 AllShare Cast Hub Streaming Videos The hub supports streaming of purchased media content that contains DRM Digital Rights Management Note You can control the volume level of your playback file being shown on your TV by using your device s Volume buttons For additional volume use your TV s volume controls To stream video content to your Tv via AllShare Cast Hub 1 Connect your AllShare Cast Hub to your TV For more information refer to Connecting AllShare Cast Hub on page 195 2 Verify your
11. SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusual physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratches dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from improper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not fur
12. e Settings amp Apps creates a TecTile that will change device settings or launch an application Choose from Change Phone settings Launch an App Join a Wi Fi Network or Show a Message e Phone amp Text creates a TecTile that will either call or text a designated recipient The outgoing text message can also be pre programmed into the TecTile Choose from Make a Call send a Text Message Share a Contact or Start a Google Talk Conversation e Location amp Web creates a TecTile that shares either a Web page or address or checks you in on a social network application Choose from Show an Address or Location Foursquare Check In Facebook Check In or Open a Web Page 7 e Social creates a TecTile that updates your social network Choose from Update Facebook Status Facebook Like Tweet a Status Follow a Twitter User Connect on LinkedIn Follow the on screen programming instructions Once you have configured and programmed your TecTile action hold the device over your TecTile to upload the new programming information Place the TecTile in a convenient location Note TecTiles do not work on metal surfaces For more information visit us at www samsung com us tectile To program your TecTile to send a text message 1 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt s TecTile Select Phone amp Text gt Send Text Message Fill in the Recipient s Number and Recipient s Name fields with your contact informati
13. only USB Debugging When enabled allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box Development device ID The identification number for your device when using it as a development tool displays in this field Allowing Mock Locations Note This feature is used for development purposes only If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this device you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS locations In other words the phone is allowed to mock the coordinates 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box Desktop Backup Password Protect the desktop with a backup password ID 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Desktop backup password 3 Inthe Settings screen enter the current full backup password the new password for full backups then enter the new password again 4 Tap Set backup password to save the password change User Interface Options Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the way the screen behaves when using applications or displaying data 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer o
14. 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SD card 3 Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your phone For more information about syncing existing managed accounts see Accounts and Synchronization on page 291 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap Q within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 To synchronize Contacts tap Sync Contacts A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your list has not been updated repeat step 2 3 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact information Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device Display Options The Display options menu allows you t
15. 158 Press a Camera key s a the shutter m From the Home screen tap H Apps gt BA Gallery to locate your newly shot images loca o in their default storage location e External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded or RECV received folder 3 Confirm Share shot images delivered received appears in the Notifications area of the screen Using S Beam to Share Pictures This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings Tap the NFC field A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on JON On the source device containing the desired image or video tap Apps gt AN Gallery Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview window Important Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying the Lock screen They must both be active and unlocked It is recommended that the target device be on the Home screen 7 Place the two active NFC enabled devices back to back to begin 1
16. 2 From the Home screen tap xe 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location for example 911 or other official emergency number Emergency numbers vary by location 4 Tap If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do SO Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device Health and Safety Information 331 Extreme heat o
17. 303 Activation 93 Enabling 93 see Swype 97 303 Task Manger Overview 24 TecTile Joining a Wi Fi 233 Programming 232 Programming a Text Message 233 TecTiles 231 Installation 231 Tethering 271 Active Icon 256 Disconnecting 257 see USB Tethering 256 Text Adjusting Size 244 Minimum Font Size 244 Soom Amount on Double Tap 244 Text Input Methods 92 Text Input Method Selecting 92 Text Templates 132 Create Your Own 133 Text To Speech 307 Text to speech Configuration 307 Third Party Applications 290 Uninstalling 226 Time Management Calendar 259 Time Zone Selecting 310 Timer Automatic Answering 278 Tools Camera 150 369 Touches Show 313 TrackPad Configure 307 Transferring Large Files 158 272 Transferring Music Files 187 TTS 307 TTY Mode 279 U UL Certified Travel Charger 328 Understanding Your Device 25 Back View 29 Display 30 Features 25 Front View 27 Home 38 Side Views 29 Uninstalling Third party applications 226 Unknown Sources 225 Unlock Options 298 Using Face 295 Using Voice 295 370 Unmounting SD card 67 Usage Battery 289 USB Connections As Storage Device 251 USB Debugging 312 Disabling 66 USB Settings As Storage Device 251 USB Tethering 256 Activating 256 271 Use GPS Satellites 215 220 294 Use Packet Data 269 Use Wireless Networks 215 220 293 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 242 Deleting a Favorite 242 Editing Favorites 242 V Vibrate 278 Vibration Dev
18. 308 Filtering 120 First Name 120 Groups 121 Last Name First 120 Merge with Google 109 Merge with Samsung Account 109 Reject List 111 Sending All 115 Setting Default Location 110 Settings 120 Share Namecard Via 111 Sharing Sending 114 Contacts List 69 Context Menus 108 110 Navigation 57 Using 57 Cookies Emptying 242 Copying Contact 116 Corporate Email Account Syncronization 293 Add Account 293 CPU Usage Display 313 Creating a Playlist 186 Creating and sending Messages 124 Customizing Home screens 57 D Data Restrict Background Data 268 Data Limit Setting 268 Data Roaming 269 Activate Deactivate 268 270 Data Usage Cycle 268 Limiting 268 Date Selecting Format 310 Date and Time 310 Default Notifications Settings 284 Default Storage Assigning 149 Camcorder 20 149 167 Camera 20 149 Camera Storage 154 Deleting Multiple Messages 129 Single Bubble 129 Single Message 129 Deleting a contact 109 Desk Clock 207 Configuring 263 Desktop Backup Password 313 Device Reset 309 Device Options Screen 283 Display Icons 31 Settings 31 Status Bar 31 Using Negative Colors 312 Display Touch Screen 329 Displaying your phone number 69 DivX Locating VOD Number 173 Overview 173 Registering Your DivX Device 173 Registration Code 315 Do cell phones pose a health hazard 317 Dock Sound 310 Dongle AllShare Cast Hub 196 Downloading New application 224 Downloads 207 Internet Downloads 207 Other
19. Apps gt Media Hub 3 Read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the agree to the Terms and Conditions check box 4 Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit The Media Hub screen displays 5 Press and then tap My Profile Multimedia 175 Note Your Media Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application This application manages your user profile information 6 If not already signed in use the keypad to enter the required information then tap Create new account Follow the on screen instructions to complete your registration for a new Samsung account Using Media Hub 1 From the Home screen tap En Apps gt Media Hub 2 Atthe Media Hub screen What s New is displayed with recently added media that you can rent or purchase 3 The following tabs are displayed at the top of the screen e Home displays the Media Hub main screen e Movies displays movies that are available for rent or purchase Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie category The movies of that type will be displayed below 176 e TV Shows displays TV shows that are available for purchase scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category The TV shows of that type will be displayed below e My Media allows you to view all of the media that you have purchased or rented Tap a media entry to view it 4 Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you would like to purchase or rent 5
20. At the Add text screen select one of the following e S Memo allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo e Calendar allows you to add the name date and time of a calendar event to your message e Location allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps e Contacts allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message e Text templates allows you to add pre defined phrases and sentences For more information refer to Text Templates on page 132 The information is added to your message Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 36 or From the Home screen tap then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen 2 Tap to play a multimedia message e To pause playback of the multimedia message tap p 3 Ina single motion touch and drag up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Messages 127 Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the scr
21. For more information refer to Managing Wallpapers on page 63 LED Indicator This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging missed events and incoming notifications The light will turn on by default unless you turn them off 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt LED indicator 2 Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off e Charging LED lights up when the device is connected to the charger e Low battery LED lights up when the battery level is low e Missed event LED lights up when you have missed calls messages or application events Motion Settings This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope To activate motion m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation Note If Motion activation is not enabled all motion services are greyed out and disabled To activate different motion functions 1 Activate the feature by tapping the Motion activation field 2 Tap the desired on screen motion option e Direct call Once enabled the device will dial the currently displayed on screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear e Smart alert Once enabled pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages Changing Your Settings 287 288 e Double tap to top Once enabled double tap the top of the d
22. Status Bar Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call In Call Options Your phone provides a number of features that are available Displays on the You are connected to the for use during a call screen status T Mobile network and can bar make Wi Fi calls Displays on the The Wi Fi calling feature is Extra volume screen status active and in use within an enabled bar active call Dials Places a Doesnotdisplay You are charged normal a number call on hold onthe screen calling rate minutes For more Noise Call status bar information refer to Reduction duration Activating Wi Fi Calling on Adds a Ends the page 80 new Call Call Displays on the There is an error in the use or l screen status 911 registration of the Wi Fi P seater bar Calling feature speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes Bluetooth the call Headset 3 Use the phone Dialer Logs or Contacts list to make a call 82 Adjusting the Call Volume During a call use the Volume keys on the left side of the device to adjust the earpiece volume During a call press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level or Tap the on screen Extra volume button to increase the incoming call volume even more than by just using the volume keys e Enabled disabled via the Call settings menu Call settings gt Use extra vol for calls For more information refer to Configuring General Call Settings on
23. This option allows you to view a list on the current tab of current applications as sorted by size 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap the All tab to display all available applications Press and then tap Sort by size to change the current list to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy Accounts and Synchronization Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety of different sources or sites These accounts can range from Google a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server and other social sites such as Facebook and Twitter Corporate and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar events and Contacts To activate Accounts and sync 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Account and sync 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Accounts and sync slider to the right to turn it on OI Changing Your Settings 291 To deactivate Accounts and sync 3 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Account and sync 4 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Accounts and syne slider to the left to turn it off ROAA Synchronizing a All Account By default all managed accounts are synchronized You can also manually sync all current accounts Tap the Email gmail com and Password fields and enter your information Tap Sign in Your phone then communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information Your existing Gmail account
24. and other applications You must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer Important You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Mount SD card 66 Communicating with the SD card 1 Insert the SD card into the external SD card slot For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 11 2 Verify the card is properly mounted Note Your device is configured to be used as a storage media device by default If it does not respond properly you will need to verify the Debugging mode is not enabled 3 Configure the device for USB storage mode connection by verifying Debugging mode is not enabled e Press gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options e Remove a check mark from the USB debugging field if present e For more information refer to USB Debugging on page 312 4 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer 5 Confirm the new mounted drive appears as a new drive on your computer As soon as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned to the phone s storage device 6 To disconnect the new drive simply remove the USB cable from your device Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 Press gt and then tap Se
25. content If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device the message Authorization Error will be displayed and your content will not play Learn more at www divx com vod Your device must first be registered to playback protected or purchased DivX content DRM free or unprotected content does not required DivX VOD registration Locating Your VOD Registration Number 1 2 3 Press gt and then tap Settings gt About device gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register Write down your Registration code Tap OK Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased Movies To play purchased DivX movies on your device you will first need to complete a one time registration using both your device and your computer 1 2 Write down the DivX registration code that appears on screen Copy this 8 or 10 digit number down Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your computer Download the free player for your computer from www divx com Open the DivX Player on your computer and from within the VOD menu select Register a DivX Certified Device Multimedia 173 4 174 You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your account information has not already been saved in DivX Player Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration code from step 2 and create a device nickname ex Pat or Pat s Device Se
26. e Go Home allows you to return to a designated Home location When prompted initially to setup a home address enter the location into the Enter an address field and tap Save e Maps enables the on screen real time map functionality Navigation Map options Once on the map screen you can access the following features e Destination returns you to the previous Navigation options screen e Search by voice Speak your destination instead of typing e Layers allows you to switch map views e Traffic view available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving e Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old e Parking displays parking information relative to your current location e Gas Stations displays gas station location relative to your current location e ATMs amp banks displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current location Applications and Development 221 e Restaurants displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location While on the map screen press to access additional options Set destination returns you to the navigation options screen where you can access a destination by either Speaking Typing
27. noise Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility If you have questions about return or exchange policies consult your service provider or phone retailer Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill 338 Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas Such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile d
28. or edit the contacts that were stored 282 Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Voicemail You can view your voicemail number from this menu k 2 Press and then tap R Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Voicemail service 3 Tap My carrier If an additional voicemail service is in use other than Carrier tap Voice settings to now view your selected voicemail number and information Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound The following options display Sound Profiles 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Sound profiles 3 Select either Sound Vibrate or Mute Note Use both the Sound profile and enable the Mute option to guarantee no vibrations or sounds from your device This really helps at night so you don t wake up hearing your device vibrating on a nearby counter or table or 1 From the Home screen press the Lock key until Device options displays 2 Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode the current mode displays Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the pho
29. search preferences Google Account provides a list of current Google accounts configured on the device Use Web History includes search matches from Google s online search engine Manage Web History helps to manage the personalized search history associated with your current registered Google account Clear on device search history erases the history for recently selected search results Use My Location uses your My Location information for Google search results and services Terms of Service displays the applications service terms Open Source Licenses displays the applications open source e Legal information This option displays information about license information Open source licenses License settings as well as Google legal About Device information This information clearly provides copyright and This menu contains legal information system tutorial distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms information and other phone information such as the model of Service us of lig 2 Android powered Phones and number firmware version baseband version kernel version much more pertinent information as a reference and software build number Read the information and terms then press to return to To access phone information the Settings menu m Press gt and then tap Settings gt About m as Tip To find your device s DivX registration code and device The following inf
30. 1 Verify Bluetooth is active Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices Important If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page 248 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Fey Settings 3 Toggle the Call audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s on board microphone 4 Toggle the Media audio field to activate de activate the Bluetooth device s headset functions Note If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone but retains the knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device there is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 3 Tap OK to confirm disconnection Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
31. 22 Accessing Your Voice Mail You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding on the keypad or by using the phone s Application icon then tapping the Voice Mail application To access Voice Mail using the menu __ 1 From the Home screen tap and then touch and hold until the device dials voicemail Note Touching and holding will launch Visual voicemail if it is already active on your device 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voicemail center Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1 Dial your wireless phone number 2 When you hear your voicemail greeting press the asterisk key on the phone you are using 3 Enter your passcode Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap ER Apps gt oO Visual Voicemail 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next 3 Read the on screen information and tap Done A list of the voicemail messages displays Important If this is your first time to access Visual Voicemail you may be prompted to enter a new PIN code and tap Next to activate Visual Voicemail Note You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 4 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back To ch
32. A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take information Create special animated messages for your pictures or shoot video friends using handwritten messages text photos Itis recommended that you confirm your default storage background images and music m From the H t Apps gt e ele rom the Home screen ta s z B HE Apps 2 Log in to the service and follow the on screen E Camera instructions For more information refer to Using the Camera on 150 OF MOTE MONNARI FELET 10 Cena Mena ea ON agen For more information visit https web samsungchaton com For more information refer to ChatON on page 145 206 Clock Here you can set an Alarm configure and view the World clock use a Stopwatch set a Timer or use a Desk Clock The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger m From the Home screen tap HY Apps gt LD x Clock For more information refer to Clock on page 261 Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Contacts For more information refer to Contacts List on page 103 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Downloads 2 Tap an available file category tab Internet down
33. AVI and DivX e Video Player support for PIP Picture in Picture viewing DivX Certified to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium content Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi Fi connection Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your device The following list correlates to the illustrations 1 Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music Indicator light illuminates with a series of distinct colors and flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and statuses Events include Charging Low battery and Missed event e Powering on blue blinks animates Battery Charging red remains on e Battery Fully Charged green remains on e Low Battery or Charging Error red blinks animates e Missed Notification Call or Messaging orange blinks animates For more information refer to LED Indicator on page 287 UN Ma zl Cou ealie 4 i OEE i EE Understanding Your Device 2 7 28 Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Edit Create folder Search and Settings options Home key displays the Home screen when pressed Press and hold to display your recent apps Task manager and Remove all option Double press to activate S Voice USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as
34. Call Number to redial the current phone number e Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry e Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial e Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient e Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry e Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list Altering Numbers from the Logs List If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number From the Home screen tap gt S 2 Touch and hold an entry to access the entry specific context menu 3 Tap Edit number before call 4 Edit the number using the on screen keypad or delete digits by pressing a to erase the numbers 5 Tap once the number has been changed Erasing the Call logs List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Logs list To clear a single entry from the listi 1 From the Home screen tap K gt S 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Delete gt OK To clear all e
35. Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap EY 2 Press and then tap Import Export gt Send namecard via 3 Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap Done and select a delivery method e Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another bluetooth compatible device e ChatON to send the contacts to selected buddies e Dropbox to upload the entries to your remote Dropbox web storage location e Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet e Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet based email e Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message Note The Web storage Upload feature requires that you are logged into your Samsung account prior to upload e Wi Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi Fi Direct
36. Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Bolo C3 Displays when there is a new text message Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Email message Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Gmail message Displays when anew Google notification has been received Displays when the T Mobile Name ID application did not recognize a recent number and would like to know whether you wish to Not add or add as a New or Existing number Cl O 2 O B Displays when the time and date fora Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 259 Displays when an alarm is set For more information referto Setting an Alarm on page 261 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are si
37. From the Google application select Messenger 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google Tap Add account to create another account 4 When prompted configure the Sync contacts 148 parameter Sync contacts or Don t sync and tap Continue When prompted configure the Instant Upload parameters as desired and tap DONE Follow any on screen setup instructions At the Messenger screen tap to start a new message In the upper text field enter a name email address or circle In the bottom message field enter a message then tap gt send From the Messenger screen tap Learn more for more detailed information Section 8 Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your device including the Camera Camcorder Music Player AllShare Play and how to manage your photos images and sounds You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already 16 32GB of built in storage Assigning the Default Storage Location Important Too many users can overlook this storage location until something goe
38. JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO 350 ADVICE OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO 12 Limitation of Liability SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES IN APP PURCHASES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON T
39. Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background butalso easily lets you choose which applications are leftrunning and which are closed Shutting Down Applications 1 Press and hold then tap Task manager This screen contains the following tabs e Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage location or SD card location e Help provides additional battery saving techniques 2 From the Active applications tab tap End to close selected applications or tap End all to close all background running applications Video Player The Video player application plays video files stored on your microSD card m From the Home screen tap Applications gt gt Video Player For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 171 Visual Voicemail Visual
40. TV is set to the same source as your hub and that you can see the on screen connection and configuration tutorials 3 On your device press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt AllShare Cast 4 Ina single motion touch and slide the AllShare Cast Slider to the right to turn it on ON A list of available hubs will appear on the screen Press the RESET button on the back of the hub once LED turns blue and tap the dongle entry from your device s list or If reconnecting verify the hub s LED is blinking red and then tap the dongle entry from your device s list Verify AllShare Cast Hub Communicating appears at the top of the device s screen Verify the previous Wi Fi Direct On now displays Wi Fi Direct Communicating To playback a user created video e From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt Ky Gallery e Locate your video and tap it to begin playback Your TV now shows the video To playback a DRM purchased video e From the Home screen tap HE Apps gt K Gallery Locate your video and tap it to begin playback e From the Home screen tap E Apps gt EE Play Movies Locate your purchased video and tap it to begin playback e From the Home screen tap EF Apps gt Dl Video Player Locate your video and tap it to begin playback Multimedia 199 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home
41. Tap tap Buy or Rent Choose a payment method and then follow the on screen instructions The media stores to the My Media folder Media Hub Notices e Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Media Hub Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account e You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days e You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re download availability and studio permissions You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have acquired through the Service e You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content e Unlike purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be viewable on only 1 device in your account Media Content is downloaded and saved to internal memory No SD Card included out of box e Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal e You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered e You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback e Stopp
42. Your Mobile Device 0 cee ewes 338 FCC Notice and Cautions 338 Other Important Safety Information 339 Section 14 Warranty Information 341 Standard Limited Warranty 341 End User License Agreement for Software 346 MOOI aa 354 Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing and charging the battery installing the micro SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using your device for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery and install the micro SIM card The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your phone A robust index for features begins on page 354 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 317 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigation may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available k
43. aaua aaa 235 Voice Recorder 0000 ee 235 VPN Client 6 042222cacucudbenceenehan 236 YouTube scence ane lt cttre ate ee brace aoe wo 236 Section 10 Connections 238 Internet 0 ee eee 238 PE OO nuns nk eae cede cas cece netacs 245 Enable Downloading for Web Applications 250 PC Connections oxc20 esos ae os otee wade 250 NCSA sacancasenesanceeeeeutoasans 252 WEE oc ee eee be eee oes bees oes 253 USB Tethering 0c cece eens 256 Mobile HolSpot conn ke ce oe woke co cae 257 Section 11 Time Management 259 62161715 Jae ec ae 259 OC ca toca bee tee ee ae eee ee eines 261 World Clock 0 0 0 cece eee 262 SIOPWATCI caia tadina td a a ae oe Oe 263 Setting a Timer cece cece 263 Configuring a Desk Clock 263 Section 12 Changing Your Settings 264 Accessing Settings 00000ee 264 Wi Fi Settings 0 00 cece eee 264 Bluetooth settings 00000e 266 Data Usage cee eee 268 More Settings 0 0 0c cece ee eaee 269 Call Settings 0 ccc cee ee eee 217 Sound Settings 00 e ee eee 283 Display Settings 0000 285 Wallpaper aa a cc inns a ducdacaur datas eda we 287 LED WGIGAUON 425 6920605 see soa krri eiii 28 Motion Settings wos 60tdcnet eee deaeeas 287 Power Saving Mode 000 288 SD Card amp Device Storage 289 Battery USCC o cacao ox de ase e
44. add new words to the built in predictive text dictionary Tap Add word and use the keyboard to enter the new word Tap Done to store the new word e T9 Trace like using Swipe allows you to type words by swyping between on screen keys Entering Text 97 98 e Handwriting enables the device to recognize on screen handwriting and convert it to text e Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application e Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style e Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen QWERTY keyboard e Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key e Key tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an on screen key e Key tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on screen key e Tutorial launches a brief on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard e Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration Using Predictive Text The predictive text system provides next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wron
45. and play a song 3 Tap gt P adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Select the desired target playlist Playing a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap BH Apps gt GP Play Music 2 Select the PLAYLISTS tab 3 Tap Dp next to a playlist title and tap Play Deleting a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap BE Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Display the PLAYLISTS library view 3 Tap A next to a playlist title and tap Delete Multimedia 183 Music Player The Music Player is an application that can play music files The music player supports files with extensions AAC AAC eAAC MP3 WMA 3GP MP4 and M4A Launching the Music Player allows you to navigate through your music library play songs and create playlists music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap a library category tab to select the music category All Playlists Albums Artists Music square or Folders 3 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback Note The 5 1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is connected through the headset jack only 184 4 Use any of the following Music Player controls MOB Be BME Pause the song Start the song after pausing Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to previous song Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song Volume control Plays the entir
46. and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi Direct slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Read the on screen information and tap OK To enable Share shot on Camera 1 From the Home screen tap E Camera gt Shooting Mode gt Share shot 2 If you are prompted to activate your Wi Fi Direct connection tap OK and follow the activation procedures for Wi Fi Direct 3 From the on screen Wi Fi Direct connection screen tap Multi connect and tap those devices you wish to share images with Note Only those devices that support multi connect are listed 4 Tap Done to complete the connection process 5 Each partner including yourself must then tap Accept to consent to the new Wi Fi Direct pairing Multimedia 157 To configure your Share Shot options 1 3 4 5 Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active see below Confirm the Wi Fi is actively sharing icon appears at the top of the viewfinder window Tap ed Share profiles with to display list of current participants e Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and removing the green check mark Tap KA Shooting modes to display list of currently available shooting modes from within Share Shot Tap EJ Settings to disable share shot while maintaining a Wi Fi Direct connection To take share shot images 1 2
47. calllogs videos photos bookmarks IMs and even send SMS messages directly from your home computer For more information refer to Kies Air on page 252 Understanding Your Device 45 46 Latitude Lets you see your friends locations and share yours with them The application also lets you see your friends locations on a map or in a list It also lets you send instant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations For more information referto Latitude on page 211 Local Displays company locations as markers on Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more For more information refer to Local on page 214 Maps Launches a Web based dynamic map that helps you find local businesses locate friends view maps and get driving directions For more information refer to Maps on page 215 Media Hub Provides you with a one stop shop for the hottest movie and TV content You can now rent or purchase your favorite content and then watch it from the convenience of anywhere For more information refer to Media Hub on page 175 Messaging Provides access to text and multimedia messaging SMS and MMS For more information refer to Creating and Sending Messages on page 124 Messenger Allows you to bring gr
48. cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below 318 Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage for more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma and a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than 12 hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can be found at http www larc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200_E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a
49. code via either SMS text message or Voice answering machine call to your device 146 Note If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS this 7 information is sent directly to your device Once received the Verification field is automatically filled in Enter your real name and tap OK Adding Your First Chat On Buddy 1 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Chaton Tap Add buddy and choose a search method e Address e to search by Country code and phone number e Search by Samsung Account ID el to search by using a known samsung account ID Select a country code if it differs from yours Enter the information and tap ey Search Once the recipient is matched their entry appears in the Results area Tap l Add buddy and confirm your new buddy appears in the Buddies tab Note For more information press Settings and tap General gt Help Using ChatON for Chatting 1 From the Home screen tap ERY Apps gt gt Chaton 2 Tap the Buddies tab Buddy s Bubble and select a buddy to initiate your chat 3 Enter your message using the on screen Are you goimg to the text entry method Caco GIRE 4 Tap Sey Send 1 While the chat session Sounds great tear To reply to a ChatON message m C is active tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message 2 Compose your reply Your texts are colored qMwerty no ie Sm ee og k
50. continue Adjust the various on screen configuration fields and tap Next It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load e Enabling the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi option decreases the wait time to access large email attachments If prompted read the Activate device administrator screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup process Note This process can take a few minutes If the previous setup screen re appears ignore it and do not alter any fields during this process 15 Identify your new work email account with a unique name Ex Work then tap Done Messages 139 Opening an Exchange Email Deleting an Exchange Email Message 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Email m Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the select Delete from the on screen context menu complete email account list page 0r 3 Select an exchange email account and tap an email With the email message displayed tap pi Delete message bee i Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings Refreshing Exchange Email 1 Press gt 3 and then tap Settings gt Accounts 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Email and syne 2 Select an email aceon 2 Tap Key adjacent to the Microsoft Exchange account e If you are already in an email account tap the account name field to reveal the account s synchronization settings field upper lef
51. enabled device Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a recipient For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 103 1 From the Home screen tap 2i 2 Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth Important You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature 4 Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient Contacts 115 Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your phone s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap 32 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SIM card 3 Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries or Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection 4 Tap Done The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM 116 Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SIM card Note These must be contacts stored on the phone External entries Google Exchange etc can not be transferred in this manner
52. large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http www ukcosmos org index html Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http www creal cat programes recerca en_projectes creal view php ID 39 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer Statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gov Cell Phone Industry Actions A
53. listed places Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches RECOMMENDATIONS or IN THIS AREA a list of places within this category displays 4 Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature 5 Press and then tap Add a search The functions adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you must have an active data 3G 4G or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city m From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt K Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 293 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Location services
54. mode allows you to set the Scene to help take the best pictures possible Options include None Portrait Landscape Night Sports Party Indoor Beach Snow Sunset Dawn Fall Color Firework Text Candlelight and Backlight Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider tt Settings continued Focus mode allows you to set this option to Auto focus or Macro Use Auto focus for all other focal situations Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a picture Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Black and white Sepia Washed out Cold vintage Warm vintage Posterize Solarize Blue point Green point or Red yellow point Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 8M 3264x2448 W6M 3264x1836 3 2M 2048x1536 W2 4M 2048x1152 W0 9M 1280x720 or 0 3M 640x480 White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent tt Settings continued ISO ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera Choose from Auto 100 200 400 or 800 Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light a higher ISO number to take photos
55. only provide a username 8 Update or re enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information provided by your server e Exchange Server your exchange server remote email address Typically starts with mail XXX com Obtain this information from your company network administrator Important Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information e f your network requires SSL encryption tap the Use secure connection SSL field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option should be enabled e f your network requires that you accept SSL certificates tap the Accept all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option is not required Confirm this information with your IT Administrator Important If your Exchange server requires this feature leaving this field unchecked can prevent connection 9 Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the Use client certification option 10 With the new server information entered tap Next 11 12 13 14 Read the on screen Activation disclaimer and when prompted tap OK The device then verifies your incoming server settings If prompted read the Remote security administration information and tap OK to accept the service and
56. options e Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage For more information refer to Data Roaming on page 269 e Restrict background data prevents background data usage This can helo prevent over usage of your data minutes e Show Wi Fi usage activates an additional Wi Fi tab that shows you your Wi Fi data usage More Settings This tab displays additional wireless and network information m Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings Using Airplane mode This mode allows you to use many of your device s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited Important When your device is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Tap Airplane mode A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Airplane mode is active The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of your screen Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options m Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks The following options display Use packet data Allows you to a
57. or use of incompatible phones batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to serious injuries damages to your phone or other serious hazard Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and accessories may not be available in your area We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take back companies in every state in the country Drop It Off You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect usactivities environment _samsungrecyclingdirect_locations jsp Health and Safety Information 327 Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile at these locations for no fee devices and batteries Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance batteries at m
58. page 277 From the Home screen you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history Tap Add call to dial the second call Dial the new phone number and tap EH To switch between the two calls Tap Swap The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold The new active call displays a green background behind the number Call Functions and Contacts List 83 Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps 1 Tap gt Speaker off to toggle the speakerphone on 2 Tap fam Speaker on to toggle the speakerphone off Tip When the speaker is turned On the color of the speaker is green When the speaker is turned Off the color of the speaker is gray Muting a Call 1 Tap Mute off to turn mute on so the other caller cannot hear you speaking 2 Tap Mute on to turn mute off and resume your conversation Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1 Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call 2 Whil
59. palm along the one side of the device and then slowly swipe it in the Opposite direction over the screen Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo 1 From the Home screen tap FRY Apps gt K Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it With the image displayed press and then tap Set picture as gt Contact photo Tap a contact to make a selection 5 Use the on screen crop the image by dragging it around or out from its corners 6 Tap Done to store the new image Multimedia 163 Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper i 164 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt Ky Gallery Select a folder location and tap a file to open it With the image displayed press and then tap Set picture as Select one of the two options e Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home screen and Lock screens e Home screen wallpaper assigns the current image to the home screen background This image is spread across all available screens e Lock screen wallpaper assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image or Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image Editing a Photo You can edit your photos using the optional Photo editor application on your device For more informati
60. phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 2 Press and then tap K Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers Tap Enable FDN 4 Atthe prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing the PIN2 Code 1 2 DoR Press and then tap pais Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code Changing Your Settings 281 Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 Press and then tap K Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed dialing numbers 3 Tap Enable FDN 4 Atthe prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK FDN is enabled 5 Tap FDN list then press and then tap Add contact
61. screen tap EH Apps gt jo T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Note T Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any Wi Fi connections must be disabled 3 Tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection 200 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or Purchase Options to buy the paid features Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Live TV On Demand My Media More Info Browse or Live Channels YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos 3 Press gt Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile if you prefer high quality output Multimedia 201 Section 9 Applications and Development This section contains a description of each application that is available in the Applications Menu its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the applicat
62. speed for the mouse trackpad 1 Press gt 3 and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Pointer speed 2 Adjust the slider and tap OK Changing Your Settings 307 Back up and Reset Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data Press gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 308 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 309 6 Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 309 Prior to doing a Factory Reset Before initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more informati
63. t zee Vik am H My Bubble Blue and your buddy s Text Message Thread messages are white 3 Tap lt 2 Send to deliver your reply Deleting a single message bubble 1 From the Home screen tap FRY Apps gt gt Chaton 2 Launch achat session to reveal the message string 3 Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 18 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Ot Google 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Add account to create another account Messages 147 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google 5 Visit www google com mobile for more information Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your device 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 18 2 om the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt i i Messenger
64. tap Ea Apps gt IED T Mobile TV For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 200 TecTiles Although not installed by default this application works with TecTiles to automatically change settings launch selected applications or many other useful features Note TecTiles are sold separately You can scan a TecTile by turning on your device enabling NFC and then tapping the back of your device to the TectTile For more information refer to Near Field Communication on page 271 Important The NFC feature must be enabled prior to using TecTiles Turning on the NFC feature m From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt Settings gt More settings gt NFC Installing the TecTile application 1 Tap the back of the device to a TecTile to automatically be directed to the Play Store s TecTile application and select Download If you do not already have it follow the on screen instructions to download it from the Play Store or Navigate to the Play Store search for and install the TecTile application Verify the TecTile app w appears within the Applications screen Applications and Development 231 232 On T Mobile GALAXY S M Programming your TecTile 1 Ensure NFC feature is on and the TecTile app is loaded to your device Launch the TecTile application 5 Read the on screen information and tap OK Select the TecTile type and the action Choose from
65. the clip 2 Press and then tap Share via 3 Select a sharing option Choose from ChatON Dropbox Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging YouTube Gmail and Email 4 Select either individual videos or tap Select all 5 Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit 172 Using Picture In Picture This feature can be used during playback of supported video types via either the Gallery Play Videos or Video player Note Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in the foreground ex Camera Camcorder screen This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a background operation while you multi task and do other things such as surf the Internet access your Contacts list look for a picture etc 1 From the Home screen tap Apps 2 Tap the desired video playback application 3 Tap the desired video to begin playback Note The Picture In Picture feature only works when using the Video player application Other video players ex YouTube do not support this feature 4 As playback is initiated locate and tap Fim Picture in Picture from the bottom right of the playback screen Your current video is then sent to foreground of any new page and most application screens 5 The video disappears from the screen once it ends DivX Overview This device is able to playback DivX videos DivX Certified to play Divx video up to HD 720p including premium
66. toggle capitalization lowercase Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters All lowercase 3 Displays when the next character is entered in By default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space Entering Text 95 Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap REIS to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Once in this mode the text input type shows Reem Note After typing an initial uppercase character the ij key changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard lf you make a mistake tap to erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Tap EA Send to deliver the message 96 Using Symbol Numeric Mode Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays WV Yeu 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation if desired 2 Tap Rel to con
67. your phone or it is powered off Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Fey Settings gt Unpair to delete the paired device Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Contact information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap Contacts Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5 A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list Connections 249 Enable Downloading for Web Applications Important Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 1
68. 1 Also see Mounting the SD Card on page 66 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen gt Unknown sources check box 2 Tap OK to allow install of non Play Store applications Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the installation of non Play Store applications Warning Not all web applications are safe to download In order to protect your phone and data use the Play Store to install web applications For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 224 200 PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes Media storage allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of both the device and optional microSD to store and upload files This feature allows your computer to detect the device as a removable storage drive Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network Kies allows you to manage music movies and photos You can also backup precious contacts and calendars download apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your devices Note To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is available at http Awww samsung com kies for Windows Mac Note If you are a Windows XP user ensure tha
69. 61 e Share apps allows you to share information about selected applications with external users page 59 e Hide applications allows you to specify which current applications are hidden from view in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done e Show hidden applications allows you to specify which previously hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done Press to return to the Home screen Understanding Your Device 41 The following table contains a description of each application available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the Applications screens If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided For information on navigating through the Applications icons see Navigating Through the Application Menus on page 56 N D 42 Access T Mobile This application provides you online access to account information such as your current activity billing information service plans downloads and other information For more information refer to Access T Mobile on page 202 AllShare Play Allows you to share your on device media content with other external devices using DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance and built in AllShare Play technology For more information refer to A lShare Play on page 203 Provides access t
70. Activate and Connect 273 Assigning a Name 273 On 157 273 World Clock DST Settings 262 WPA2 PSK 257 258 371 Yahoo 244 YouTube High Quality 237 High Qulaity 201 Settings 237 372
71. Address Work Events Groups Ringtone Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname Website Internet call or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry e f you re updating an existing contact tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5 Tap the destination field and choose from MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phone depending on where you want to save the new contact information Tap the Name and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad e Tap to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Picture or Take picture To save a Number from your Keypad 1 From the Home screen tap Phone 2 Enter a phone number using the on screen dialpad 3 Tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list or Press and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destinati
72. Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 79 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 3 Tap the Wi Fi Calling field and place a green check mark in the adjacent field This check mark indicates the feature is active Changing Your Settings 275 Wi Fi Calling Settings Important A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Calling Settings 2 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature e Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls 3 Tap OK to save the setting 4 Tap Help from the main Wi Fi Calling Settings page to navigate through either an on screen tutorial or review the top 10 Wi Fi Calling questions 2 6 Kie
73. D card is designed for use with this mobile device and other devices Note microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 64GB Note This device supports up to a 64GB microSDHC memory card The device comes in either a 16GB or 32GB model 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device 3 Orient the card with the gold strips facing down 4 Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it clicks into place For more information on how to use the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 65 Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phone s contacts Removing the microSD Memory Card 1 2 Remove the battery cover Firmly press the card into the slot and release it The card should pop partially out of the slot Remove the card from the slot Replace the battery cover Getting Started 11 Battery Removing the Battery Before using your device for the first time install the battery Grip the battery at the top end 3 and lift it up and out and charge it fully of the battery compartment 4 Important Before removing or replacing the battery make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the G key until the power off image displays then tap Power off Installing Battery Installing the Battery 1 Slide the battery into the c
74. Display contacts by Service numbers and Send contact Contact Menu Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap 32 Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display e Edit allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry e Delete allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry e Join contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for e Share contact information allows you to send the current entry info via text message e Add to favorites allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the list within the Favorites tab e Remove from favorites allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab e Add to group allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing group e Add to reject list Remove from reject list allows you to add Contact Entry Options or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically 1 From the Home screen rejected incoming phone numbers tap e Share namecard via allows you to send the current Contact 2 Tap an entry to reveal the entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Contact entry s Overview ChatON Dropbox Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Screen This screen Messaging or Wi Fi Direct contains
75. Downloads 207 Dropbox Uploading Picture 209 E Edit Page 58 Email 133 Changing Signature 136 141 Composing 135 Configuring Settings 136 Creating an Internet Account 134 Internet Email 134 359 Opening 135 Refreshing Messages 135 Sending 120 Wi Fi Download of Attachments 136 141 Emergancy Alerts 131 Emergency Alert Preview 131 Alerts 131 Emergency Alert Configuration 132 Emergency Alerts AMBER 131 Imminent Extreme 131 Severe 131 Emergency Calls 330 Making 71 With SIM 72 Without SIM 71 Emoticons 126 Ending A call 70 Entering Text 92 Using T9 Trace 93 360 Equalizer In Call 280 In Call 280 Erasing files from Memory card 67 Evernote 228 Exchange Email 137 Account Setup 137 Composing 140 Configuring Settings 140 Deleting Message 140 Opening 140 Refreshing Messages 140 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 317 Extreme Alert Disable 132 F Face Unlock 295 Facial Recognition 295 Factory Data Reset 309 Prior To 308 Factory data reset 68 Favorites Tab 122 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 336 FCC Notice and Cautions 338 Fixed Dialing Numbers 281 Flipboard 210 Folder Create 40 Font Size 286 Style 286 Font Size Caption 237 Changing 312 Minimum Setting 244 G Gallery Folder Options 160 Image Options 160 Opening 171 Picture In Picture 172 Slideshow Settings 160 Game Hub 210 Games Volume 283 Gestures Browse Image 55 Overview 54 Screen Capture 55 Shak
76. HIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 9 10 11 AND 12 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 13 U S Government End Users Restricted Rights The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as commercial items consisting of commercial software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Products are provided only with restricted rights with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation FAR 52 227 19 14 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS without regard to conflicts of laws principles This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded 15 DISPUTE RESOLUTION a Non United States residents If a dispute controversy or difference is not amicably settled it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul Korea in accordance with the Ar
77. Hold 83 Home 38 Home City Setting 298 Home Key 38 Home Screen Assigning a New 59 Changing Wallpaper 63 Menu Settings 40 Overview 38 362 Home screens Customizing 57 HSPA 257 Icons Description 31 Indicator 31 Status 31 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 163 Assigning as wallpaper 164 Transferring 251 308 Verifying 251 308 Importing and Exporting To micro SIM card 120 In Call Options 82 In call Options 84 Sound Equalizer 278 Incognito 240 Create Window 240 Exit Window 240 Incoming Call Vibration Setting 284 Indicator icons 31 Information Ticker 298 International Call 75 International Calls Making 75 Internet 238 Clear Cookies 243 Search 239 Set Home Page 243 Internet Calls Adding SIP Accounts 279 Settigns 279 Internet Downloads 207 Internet Email 133 IP Address 315 J Joining Contact information 112 K Kies Air Before Using 251 Language Select 302 LDAP 103 110 Live Shooting 167 Live Wallpaper Selecting 63 Local 214 Location and Google Services 294 Lock Screen 294 Camera Quick Access 298 Changing Wallpaper 64 Clock 298 Dual Clock 298 Options 298 Ripple Effect 298 Say Wake Up Command 298 Shortcuts 298 Showing Owner Info 299 Ticker 298 Viewing Missed Calls 91 Weather 298 Logs 88 Accessing 88 Accessing from Notifications 89 Altering Numbers 90 Erasing 90 Low battery indicator 15 M Making Emergency Calls 71 International Calls 75 New call 69 Managing Applications Clearing A
78. MAGE TO THE MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE Warranty Information 349 ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION SOME
79. MSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT
80. Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device names to begin the connection process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established 6 When prompted to complete the connection tap OK The status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing AllShare Cast With AllShare Cast you can wirelessly mirror what is currently displayed on your device s screen with an external TV via the AllShare Cast Hub For more information refer to A iShare Cast Hub on page 194 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt AllShare Cast Changing Your Settings 273 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the AllShare Cast slider to the right to turn it on E The slider color indicates the activation status Note This feature allows a connection between your device and the optional AllShare Cast Hub via a shared Wi Fi Direct connection The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the device s display For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 194 VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Note Before using VPN you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or pa
81. Music notification icon down from the Status bar and tap the song title from the Notifications area You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in the panel For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 36 Tab Options There are various options available from the various tabs 1 From the Home screen tap EFA Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Select one of the following tabs and tap A to access an available option e RECENT to display the most recently played songs and albums e ARTISTS Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or search Multimedia 181 e ALBUMS Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or search e SONGS Play Add to playlist Shop for artist Delete or Search e PLAYLIST Play Rename or Edit e GENRES Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or search Options While Playing a Song When you play a song the Now playing screen displays There are various options and controls available while a song is playing 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Ge Play Music 2 Tap an album or song 3 From the Now playing screen press Menu to display the following options e Sound effects Applies selected sound effects e Show Hide options View additional playback features such as shuffle and repeat e Settings Allows you to view information such as Open source licenses and Music version 182 Tap gt Add to playlist to ad
82. N TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION SAFE DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES In addition information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with among other things the e mail platform master data management and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider solution provider or user Choice of an e mail master data management and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider solution provider or user For complete statement of limited warranty please refer to www samsung com us safe available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab devices are sold 101212 Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein Rd Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http www samsung com 9012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsun
83. NSTRUCTIONS Or call 877 278 0799 328 FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH WARRANTY DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR TOUCH SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION Display Touch Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty GPS amp AGPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are j subject to changes implemented in accordance with the injury to you Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP Changes may affect the performance of location based technol
84. Name contact e Print namecard allows you to print selected information on a numbers email and compatible Samsung printer linked contact information 3 Press to reveal the context menu specific to this entry Fd Print namecard 4 Tap an available option Contact Overview Screen Contacts 111 Joining Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts When you synchronize your phone with those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your contacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account information Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses e
85. Note If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the source device Pull them apart Verify the image is visible in the preview window on the source device providing the file Place them together again 8 From the Touch to beam screen tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer 2 After a few seconds depending on file size the recipient with then see the transferred file displayed on their screen Place device atop each other Tap the source image Multimedia 159 Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 160 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt we Gallery Select a folder location ex Camera and tap an image to open it or Touch and hold an image to place a box around the file and select multiple files or Tap the upper right camera to begin taking pictures that are placed in this folder or From the top of the window tap Pl to configure several slideshow playback settings such e Effect allows you to configure the fade effects used when the image progresses from one to another e Music allows you to assign the background music played during the slideshow Turn on the feature and select from either Choose music track Google Play or Music player e Speed assigns the length of time an image remains on screen 4 Tap Start to begin the slideshow Picture Options 1 From the Ho
86. OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO 10 THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Samsung Electronics Co makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications Since Samsung Electronics Co has no control over such applications you acknowledge and agree that Samsung Electronics Co is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with you It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to you and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and servic
87. On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Recording mode allows you to setthe recording mode to Normal is limited only by available space on the destination location e Limit MMS is limited by MMS size restrictions Settings continued Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a video Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video Options include None Negative Black and white Sepia Washed out Cold vintage Warm vintage Posterize Solarize Blue point Green point or Red yellow point Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 1920x1080 1280x720 720x480 640x480 or 320x240 White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent Anti Shake reduces image blur due to the movement of the subject of the video or hand movement Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Video quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal Settings continued Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image
88. Rejection Messages 277 Reject Calls Managing 74 Reject List Add To 75 Add to 89 90 Adding 111 Auto Reject 75 Removing 111 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 74 Assigning Single Numbers 75 Rejection Messages 277 Reset 309 Reset Device 309 Responsible Listening 332 Restarting Device 18 Restore 308 Restrict Background Data 268 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 338 Ringtone Device 284 Volume 283 Ripple 298 Ripple Effect Lock Screen 298 S S Beam 272 On 158 272 Sharing Pictures 158 S Memo Creating a New Memo 226 S Voice 229 Require Wake Up 298 Set Wake Up Command 298 Using 78 SafeSearch 306 Samsung Account Creating 20 Merge Contacts 109 Setup 176 Samsung Keyboard 93 ABC Mode 96 Changing the Input Type 95 Enabling 93 Predictive Text 97 Settings 302 Symbol Numeric Mode 96 XT9 Advanced Settings 303 Samsung Keypad Entering Symbols 97 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 327 Save a Number From Keypad 105 Scan for Nearby Devices 185 Screen Home 38 Navigation 51 Screen Capture 55 162 194 Taking a Screen Shot 163 Screen Lock Set Up 296 Sounds 285 Screen Lock Pattern Changing 297 Creating 296 Deleting 297 367 Screen Rotation 37 Auto Rotate 286 Screen Sharing Via Group Cast 162 Screen Timeout 285 Screen Unlock Face and Voice Unlock 295 Face Unlock 295 Motion 295 Swipe 294 Screens Adding and Deleting 58 Customizing 57 Rearranging 59 SD card Communicating Wit
89. SB Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads 206 To connect using USB Tethering From the Home screen tap Apps gt m Mobile HotSpot or Press gt 3 and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your device Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for the Tethering active icon in the Status bar area of the screen Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK To disconnect tethering 1 From the Home screen tap 9 Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature 3 Remove the USB cable from the device Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi hotspot The feature works best w
90. SD card 66 Multi Party Call 85 Dropping One Participant 87 Private conversation 86 Multi party call Setting up 85 Multi party calls 85 Multi Tasking Background Calling 70 Watching Videos 172 Music 218 Volume 283 Music App Adding Songs to Playlists 183 Changing Library View 179 Changing Settings 180 Creating a Playlist 183 Deleting a Playlist 183 Listening 180 Music Application 178 Now Playing Screen 181 Options While Playing 182 Playing 180 Playing a Playlist 183 Searching for Music 180 Tab Options 181 Music File Extensions 3GP 184 AAC 184 AAC 184 eAAC 184 M4A 184 MP3 184 MP4 184 WMA 184 Music Files Removing 187 Transferring 187 Music Hub 188 Making a Purchase 189 Music Player Adding Music 186 Creating a Playlist 186 Editing a Playlist 187 Making a Song a Ringtone 185 Options 185 Playing Music 184 Removing Music 187 Using Playlists 186 Voice Control 306 MusicPlayer 184 N Namecard Sending 114 Sending All 115 Share Via 114 Navigating Application Menus 56 Sub Menus 56 Through Screens 51 Navigation Enable GPS 220 Go Home 221 Options 221 Negative Colors 312 Network connection Adding anew 255 New applications Downloading 224 NFC Turning On 231 NFC Near Field Communication 271 Noise Reduction 85 Non Market Applications 225 Notification Vibration Setting 284 Notification Bar 36 Using 36 Notifications Volume 283 o Offensive Words Block 306 On Off Switc
91. Samsung GALAXY SI available at T Mobile PORTABLE QUAD BAND MOBILE PHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference a Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product including but not limited to PowerTOP and e2fsprogs incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License GPL GNU Le
92. Setting up web services allows you to set up external Web services by signing in to external sites such as Facebook Twitter YouTube etc e Auto Upload photos from mobile allows you to setup automatic upload of images from your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage list e Video quality settings allows you to setup the video quality for streamed video content e Lock AllShare Play allows you to restrict access to AllShare Play by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung account password Tap Locking AllShare Play to activate deactivate the feature e Language allows you select a display language e About displays application information e Contact Us allows you to contact the AllShare team via a new email from an available email account Setting Up Web Storage Sugarsync is a Web storage service that allows you to use storage space to store your files and share them on the Cloud Note If you are using another Web storage service log into that service first before using AllShare Play 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt D AllShare Play Note When adding storage an N Drive is added 2 From the main screen select Add storage and then tap on the media that you would like to share e A file with N in the upper left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location Selecting this media causes your device to access the file current
93. Settings From the Home screen tap HH gt Email Select an account Press fs and then tap Settings gt lt Account gt Alter any of the following settings e Account name displays your uniquely created account display name e Your name displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages e Signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails In a single motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right to turn it on LON Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap OK to save the new signature oh gt 136 e Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails e Forward with files Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email e Recent messages adjusts the number of on screen messages shown in the current category list at any one time e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Email check frequency adjusts the time interval used by your device to check your email account for new email messages e Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the pro
94. TION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY SAFE SAFE Samsung for Enterprise is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung s own internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security related solutions for MDM and VPN The testing includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device During the testing the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as described by the third party security solution providers The testing for example includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device For more information about Samsung s SAFE program please refer to www samsung com us safe Disclaimer of Warranties EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO LTD SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC AND THEIR AFFILIATES COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE INTEROPERABILITY OR NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATIO
95. VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Warranty Information 343 What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer di
96. Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order m From the Home screen tap Applications gt oo Visual Voicemail For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message 1 From the Home screen tap EN Apps gt Voice Recorder 2 Tap 3 Tap n Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list 4 From the Recorded files page press and then select one of the following e Share via and select a method in which to share this audio file Selections are Bluetooth Dropbox Email Gmail Group Cast Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Refer to each specific section depending on the method you selected to send this voice recording e Delete allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings Tap the recordings to delete and tap Delete e Rename allows you to rename your recordings Record to record an audio file Applications and Development 235 e Settings the following settings are available Storage allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved Select between Phone or memory card Default name allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings For example if your Default name is Voice your recordings would be named Voi
97. Volume down button mutes the ringer If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts the entry s name is displayed You may also see the caller s phone number if available Call Functions and Contacts List 73 Sheri 1 999 343 3333 Work Texas Incoming call Touch and drag upward to reject with a message Touch and Slide in any direction to answer the Touch and slide call in any direction to reject the call Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen tap CE 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection 74 3 Ina single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on MON The slider color indicates the activation status of the Auto reject mode e OFF disables the automatic rejection feature You must then manually reject incoming phone calls 4 Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your automatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from e All numbers enables the features for all Known and unknown numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list e Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list B
98. Wi Fi Direct connection between the device and the hub Note Wi Fi Calling cannot be used at the same time as AllShare Cast Hub Connecting AllShare Cast Hub To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware AllShare Cast with This feature functions with an Hub accessory external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV AllShare Cast Hub Status LED RESET button HDMI Travel Adapter Power 1 Connect the AllShare Cast hub to a power source via the USB Travel Adapter Note The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate it has begun the start up process LED Color Patterns Description Red Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or processing Red Blinking Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby mode ready for connection Blue Solid Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be connected with a new device 2 Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable A to A cable as shown above 3 Change the source input on your TV to match the input port used by the incoming HDMI cable Note The television screen should now display an on screen tutorial showing you how to configure your device s AllShare Cast Hub and device settings Multimedia 195 To activate AllShare Cast on your device 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt AllShare Cast 2 If not already on touch and slide the AllSha
99. a USB data cable Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them There are two microphones on the device e Bottom microphone used during handset mode e Top microphone used while an active call is in the speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation 2 microphone solution Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries 8 10 11 12 Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as the connection status received signal strength phone battery level and time Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen and allows you to video conference Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface of the screen This is typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against the screen such as during a phone call e While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust the screen brightness contrast This sensor decreases screen brightness in dim light e In a bright light condition outdoors the sensors cause the device to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing e In dim light conditions the device increases the screen brightness to compensate Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the different ring tones or sounds of
100. ading a New Google Application To download a new application you will need to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store The home page provides several ways to find applications The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps 1 From the Home screen tap F Apps gt gt Play Store 2 Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name 3 Read the application descriptions 224 Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device the Play Store displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution 4 Tap Install gt Accept amp download Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application 6 Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel The content download icon 4 appears in the notification area of the status bar 7 Onthe main Play Store screen press and then tap My Apps tap an installed application in the list
101. aeeeehe mae ee ee ws 210 GOOG F oc aed ver cccmiee ce mie eke wo ne aoe 211 Internet ees 211 KC SGI ceive cx See E op we areata op ee oe oe 211 Laltud e crcrcrcscneadandsadidadasa 211 LOCA eea ate eee E ee ete Sete ee R 214 WANS s aaacadaccehunee ee eee eet en eenn ee 219 Media Hub 0 0 cc eee eee 217 Messaging senso ie se mr wreesic wnat tots cers ercarin tein aca 217 Messenger cece cece ec eeeaees 218 4 Mobile HotSpot uana 218 More Services unuunu 218 AES eigi e EEE 24 gon rene E E EET 218 Music Player 0 0 0c eee eee eae 218 MY MNCS o apo aaalepenedaee oan ne aaa 219 Navigation cc cece eee ees 220 Phone asco 9s a acioitnar yt avet aae aea aah end 222 Play BOOKS 0 0 cece eee eee 222 Play Movies ccc c cee ees 223 Py WGC os ira ane E E eer EE 223 Play SOIG aid ak oc Fa Gos eae Rare cee 223 Downloading a New Google Application 224 Launching an Installed Google Application 225 SAN o a5 Sarena bes ae ed eros 226 S DUGOCSE ounce veeene sane eaneeenes 228 VOICE eere ear ene ee deen oe eee 229 Samsung APpS 0 cece ee ae 229 31512 10 een ne eo ae TE 230 Settings cece tte ees 230 T Mobile Name ID 0 230 T Mobile TV 2 0 0 cee eee 230 Tec Tiles errer aa 231 WA eee oe be deen es eoue Secs dase bese oe 234 Task Manager 00 cece eee 234 Video Playr serge o oo ene ae we ernes serei 235 Visual Voicemail
102. age 145 Video Player Launches your device s built in video application that plays video files stored on your microSD card For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 171 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 Voice Recorder Found within the Utility application allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message For more information refer to Voice Recorder on page 235 VPN Client This is a full featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for all major VPN Gateways For more information refer to VPN Client on page 236 Yoy YouTube Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser For more information refer to YouTube on page 201 Important For help closing any or all current applications use the Task manager For more information refer to Task Manager on page 234 Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Navigating Through the Scr
103. age 132 e Settings allows you to access Messaging settings For more information refer to Messaging Settings on page 130 e Delete threads allows you to delete any message thread select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the message Tap Delete For more information refer to Deleting a single message thread on page 129 Messages 125 Options while composing a message 1 2 126 From the Home screen tap Messaging From within an open message press to display additional messaging options e Call places an outgoing call to the sender e Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons e Preview only in MMS allows you to add preview the MMS message prior to delivery e Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as S Memo Calendar Location Contacts and Text templates e View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen e Add slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow e Remove slide allows you to remove a previously attached Slideshow e Add subject allows you to enter a subject e Duration only in MMS allows you to change the duration of the image slideshow e Layout bottom only in MMS allows you to change the layout e Delete messages allows you to erase either select specific message bubbles or all current messages bubbles Addi
104. age area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider 324 Smart Practices While Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips e U
105. and scale Bar Cache allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Location Settings lets you access and configure the location settings Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it What s New provides access to the Play Store from where you can update the application manually About displays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc Feedback allows you to provide application feedback Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy or Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu Help provides help information 214 Local Local formerly known as Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more 1 From the Home screen tap EN Apps gt 9 Local 2 Tap fey Search and then use the Search Maps field to manually enter a desired place or choose from among the various categories Matches are filtered by those closest to your current location 3 Locate and tap one of the
106. and then tap Open Tip The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap FH Apps 2 Tap the newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Play Store applications m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active Note If Unknown sources is disabled those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device Applications and Development 225 Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your device and clear the data cache or defaults m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager Clearing application cache and data 1 Press gt 3 and then ta
107. and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off m Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Security and Lock Screen on page 294 18 Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Google Maps Google Talk and the Play Store applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account To create a new Google Account from your phone 1 From the Home screen tap Play Store 2 Read the introduction and tap New to begin 3 Follow the on screen instructions to create a Google Account or If this is not the first time you are starting the device tap ERE gt M Gmail Note If you already have a Google account you only need to sign in To create a new Google Account from the Web 1 From a computer launch a Web browser and navigate to www google com 2 On the main page click Sign in gt Create an account for free 3 Follow the on screen prompts to create your free account 4 Look fo
108. and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone m From the Home screen tap HA Apps gt 4 Internet For more information refer to Internet on page 238 Kies air Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC m From the Home screen tap En Apps gt Kies air For more r refer to Kies Air on page 252 Latitude Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and status messages with each other It also lets you send instant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations Important You must sign in to your Google account enable Wi Fi and enable the Location feature before you can use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 264 Applications and Development 211 Note Although you do not have to enable location services in order to use Latitude it is recommended for best accuracy 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt 2 Latitude gt gt o Join Latitude to display your Latitude friends Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 293 2 Tap Wi F
109. and select Remove from the context menu or Press and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select X Remove entry 4 Press to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing 1 From the Home screen tap CR 2 Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location numbers 2 100 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial 3 If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap K gt gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number 78 Using S Voice This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of functions on your device This is a natural language recognition application This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms You can ask it questions Is it raining in Dallas or give it commands Show my where to find cheap gas 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Q 6 Voice 2 Read the on screen disclaimer information and tap Confirm to continue 3 Review the Terms of service and tap Agree to continue 4 Navigate through the following on screen tutorial screens by reading the information and tapping Next or tap Skip to continue without reading the information 5 Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy Note The wake up command phrase can be c
110. any retail or carrier provided locations with local regulations In some areas the disposal of these where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help information regarding specific locations may be found at us protect the environment recycle http www epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone r_n index htm or at http Awww call2recycle org Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may Mail It In exp oae The Samsung Mobile Take Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label UL Certified Travel Charger Just go to The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL http www samsung com us aboutsamsung citizenship safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety usactivities environment_samsungrecyclingdirect html INT ST instructions per UL guidelines A recyle your phone page and follow the instructions to FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY print out a free pre paid postage label and then send your LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S PROPERTY DAMAGE ule eas IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved INSTRUCTIONS recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR EE E ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE e I
111. ap a selection To delete a shortcut To insert a new primary shortcut 1 Press to go to the Home screen 1 Press and then tap HH Apps 2 Touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it 2 Locate your desired application then touch and hold from its location on the current screen the on screen icon to position it on a desired screen 3 Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab and For more information refer to Managing Shortcuts release it on page 59 Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts 3 Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want S to add as the new primary shortcut Note You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the 4 Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the exception of the Apps shortcut sareei To remove a primary shortcut 5 Ina single motion touch and hold the new shortcut then drag it to the empty space in the row of primary shortcuts The new primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and Extended screens 1 Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace then drag it to an empty space on any available screen The primary shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot Understanding Your Device 61 Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget 1 Press and then tap H Apps gt Widget
112. ard inserted into the device 186 Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap En Apps gt Music Player Tap the Playlists tab Press and then tap Create playlist Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap OK Adding Music to a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Music Player Tap the Playlists tab Tap the playlist name in which to add music Press and then tap Add or Tap Add music This option is available within user created playlists Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist 5 Tapa music file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done Removing Music from a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap uid Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Tap the playlist name in which to delete music 4 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on screen context menu 5 Tap Remove Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can also share delete or rename the playlist Note Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default playlists can not be renamed 1 From the Home screen tap gn Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on screen co
113. assword as you type it instead of using an asterisk 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Play Store applications 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Note If you are notified that you can not download a Play Store application because it comes from an Unknown source enabling this option corrects this issue Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 Press E and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Trusted c
114. ated in the number string as a comma e Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 2 sec pauses 4 Tap a Call Functions and Contacts List 75 Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap 4 Once prompted to Send the following tones tap Yes to dial the remaining digits 76 Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed received or missed if the caller is identified To recall any of these numbers 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Tap the Logs tab to display the list of recent calls 3 Tap the name number and tap Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Con
115. atically uses a 12 hour format 8 Tap Select date format and select the date format type Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Play Store 2 Select the Auto rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen 3 Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information 4 Select the Call answering ending field to activate this feature which uses either Any key to answer incoming calls or the G to end any current calls 5 Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow the accessibility shortcut under the device options to be used by pressing and holding the power key 6 Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature after a defined amount of time 7 Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically after a selected amount of time Note The Lock automatically function is only available if your device is already using the screen lock feature 8 Tap Ta
116. ating and Show received files fields to set the options Displays when Bluetooth technology is active To change your Bluetooth name 44 and there is an available open and visible 1 Verify Bluetooth is active bluetooth device 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap Device name 3 Enter anew name 4 Tap OK to complete the rename process 246 To set visibility 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never timeout Press Menu gt Visible time out This value appears as a countdown within this Visible time out field To scan for Bluetooth devices 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers To review your Bluetooth received files 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page press and then tap Show received files Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secur
117. ation and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap FH Apps gt Calculator 2 Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key 4 Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions Calendar With this feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar m From the Home screen tap ERY Applications gt 37 Calendar For more information refer to Calendar on page 259 Applications and Development 205 Camera ChatON Use your 8 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a Provides a global mobile communication service where you JPEG format The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat In this MP4 format service you Can send pictures videos animation messages Scribbles audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location Note
118. ation before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF exposure from wireless phones The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other type
119. bitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the parties b United States residents ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person s or entity s claim or dispute and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The Warranty Information 351 arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbi
120. ble rate plan minutes Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function Displays in the notifications window when action is required within the Samsung account application Displays inthe notifications window when there are too many on screen notification icons to display Tap to show more notifications Tap to select a text input method Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Music Player Understanding Your Device 35 DES 23 DDE Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Play Music application Displays when your device s GPS is on and communicating Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the microSD card has been improperly removed or unexpectedly Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to vie
121. ble to an external recipient e Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card e View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble Deleting Messages Deleting a single message thread 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete thread At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message threads 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Press and then tap Delete threads Tap each message thread you want to delete A checkmark displays beside each selected message Tap Delete 5 At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process Deleting a single message bubble 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap gt l Open a message to reveal the message string Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete message At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message bubbles 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap 3 Open a message to reveal the message string Press and then tap Delete messages Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for deletion or choose Select all Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit Messages 129 Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 From the Home screen tap gt ad 2 Press and then tap Sear
122. buddies via a group chat Share things such as pictures videos animation messages Scribbles audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location information For more information refer to ChatON on page 145 Clock Allows you to set an alarm configure and view the World clock use a stopwatch set a timer or Desk clock The applications display in atabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger For more information refer to Clock on page 207 Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory For more information referto Contacts List on page 103 Understanding Your Device 43 O be Ad Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other For more information refer to Downloads on page 207 Dropbox Provides access to your desktop files directly from your device For more information refer to Dropbox on page 207 Email Provides access to both your Outlook Exchange server based work email and Internet email accounts such as Gmail and Yahoo Mail For more information refer to Using Email on page 133 Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you Access news stories personal feeds and other related material For more information refer to Flipboar
123. c editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message m From the Home screen tap Apps gt EE Gallery For more information refer to The Gallery on page 171 210 Game Hub Provides a premium one stop service center that let s you play connect and share games on compatible Samsung Android devices Game Hub comes pre packaged with some of the most popular social and premium HD games that have been specially customized to play on your device 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Game Hub Read the on screen disclaimer and tap Confirm Follow the on screen instructions and navigate to your favorite games and services Gmail Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web m From the Home screen tap EHS Apps gt es M Gmail For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 143 Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 18 2 From the Home screen tap Apps gt QH Google For more information refer to Google on page 147 Internet Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully optimized
124. cation This application can be downloaded from the Play Store For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 169 Set picture as allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo Home and lock screens Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper Buddy photo share allows you to share the current image with active ChatON buddies Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible samsung printer Rename allows you to rename the current file Details files details such as Title Time Width Height Orientation File Size and Path Multimedia 161 Screen Sharing an Image via Group Cast Note The newly altered image with markups and comments can not be saved but you can take a screen shot of the Important Verify all of your recipients are connected to the l l i current image and save it to your Clipboard same Wi Fi For more information refer to Using Gestures on page 1 From the Home screen tap HE Apps gt K 94 Gallery 2 Tap D AllShare Play Group Cast Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target Device 3 Enter a security PIN and tap Done This process makes sure only desired recipients can view your shared image 4 Recipients must launch AllShare Play on their devices 1 Launch AllShare on the target device such as an Important Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi Fi Your device then waits for other connected re
125. ce 001 Voice 002 Voice 003 etc Recording quality allows you to set the recording quality to High or Normal Limit for MMS allows you to select On or Off If you Limit for MMS by selecting On you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a message 236 VPN Client This is a full featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for all major VPN Gateways 1 From the Home screen tap VPN CLient 2 Follow the on screen instructions to configure the VPN Client YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap EHC Apps gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos Apps gt To configure YouTube Settings m Press and then tap Settings and configure the following parameters e General High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Huge Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads e Search Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube searches from showing up in the YouTube search box SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settin
126. ce off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft e Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender or legal action or both e While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately Health and Safety Information 339 e Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician e f your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 340 Section 14 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long
127. cess of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Email notifications Activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email Gmail etc is received e Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received e Vibrate Activates a vibration when a new email message is received e Incoming settings Lets you specify incoming email settings such as User name Password IMAP server Security type Port and IMAP path prefix e Outgoing settings Lets you specify outgoing email settings such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password Note Some the above options may not be displayed when using some Internet account types Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your phone also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap HA gt Email
128. ch 3 Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap Q l 4 All messages that contain the entered search string display Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Press and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available Display e Bubble style allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message e Background style allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages 130 e Use the volume key allows you to change the text size by using the up or down volume keys Storage settings e Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them e Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation e Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation Text message SMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Manage SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card e Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them e Inp
129. ch as cookies are left on your device Note Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode To add a new incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt Incognito 2 Anew browser window displays Note The incognito icon appears in the upper left of the new browser window while you are in this mode To exit from the incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt New window 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window 3 Tap O next to the incognito listing to delete this window Using Bookmarks While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 From the webpage tap Bookmarks The Bookmarks page displays Additional pages include History and Saved pages 2 Press to display the following options e List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed e Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks e Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks e Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected fold
130. chronize all are enabled by default A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Choose from Sync interval settings Sync Gallery or Sync calendar 5 Tap Done to complete the login and sync process Return to the Accounts and sync screen and resync this new Social Network account To resync Social Network Contacts 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync 2 Tap Q within the adjacent SNS account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 3 Tap Sync now Note From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to resync all accounts Contacts 119 Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap EY 2 Press and then tap Send email Contacts that contain an email address display 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen 4 Tap Done 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send Export import For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 116 120 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view service numbers listed in you
131. cipients on the same Wi Fi network to accept the connection and enter the PIN on their screens Internet TV Samsung Tablet etc From the Home screen tap bk Apps gt Ay Gallery or Seo Note You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before Tap Start Group Cast anyway to continue the process you can use this feature while your users connect 3 Open a selected image 4 Tap Stream to connected devices and select an available target device to begin streaming You can now interact and draw with the on screen image users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact 162 5 Ona target device ex Internet TV select the on screen Allow button to continue Note At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source 6 Confirm AllShare Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source Taking a Screen Shot Also known as a screen capture this feature allows you to mimic the print screen function on most computers 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation 2 Tap the desired on screen motion option 3 Although enabled by default enable the Palm swipe to capture field by placing a check mark in the adjacent field 4 With the current screen showing the desired image in a single motion place the side of your
132. con no longer appears 5 Enter your the required information and tap Sign up in the Notifications area at the top of the screen Note You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via Note Without confirming your email address and following the email documented procedures related applications will not function properly since it is Samsung account that is 6 Verify your account via email by accessing the email managing their username and password access address provided during setup and following the steps outlined to complete your registration If you have already setup your email account on the device tap Go to Mailbox and follow the on screen instructions If you have already verified your email address tap Activate account Getting Started 21 Voice Mail Setting Up Your Voice Mail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network 1 From the Home screen tap K and then touch and hold the key until the device dials voicemail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name
133. creen then select sits Select input method gt Configure input methods Tap Fey adjacent to the Google voice typing field Select a language by tapping Select input languages area Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages Select the desired languages Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Configuring Voice Input Controls This feature allows you to use pre defined voice commands to control various features on your device Actions include Incoming calls Alarm Camera and Music 1 Press gt E and then tap Settings gt Language and input In a single motion touch and slide the Voice cmd for apps slider to the right to turn it on Read the Voice input control disclaimer about restricting volume for event alerts and tap OK Tap the Voice cmd for apps field Enabling an option in this menu activates its voice control functionality Tap Incoming call to activate a voice control for answering or rejecting an incoming call e Answer an incoming call by clearly saying Answer e Reject an incoming call by clearly saying Reject Tap Alarm to activate a voice control for stopping or snoozing an active alarm event e Stop an alarm for continuing to sound by clearly saying Stop e Snooze an alarm until the next reminder interval by clearly
134. creen use one of the following options o Call KE to call the entered number Delete EI to delete digits from the current number Voice Mail e to access your Voice Mail service To view additional dialing options m Tap e Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active e Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry e Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you Can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry e Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed e Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the phone waits for your input A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes e Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen Answering a Call When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or name if stored in Contacts List displays m At the incoming call screen e Touch and slide oz to answer the call e Jouch and slide to reject the call e Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to create a new custom outgoing response Pressing the
135. creens A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is active 6 Activate Auto haptic to allow your device to automatically vibrate in response to the sounds of downloadable apps such as games In a single motion drag the slider to the right to turn it on JON Display Settings In this menu you can change various settings for the display such as the font orientation pop up notifications puzzle lock feature animation brightness screen timeout and power saving mode Adjusting the Screen Display 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Display 2 Configure the following screen display settings e Brightness adjusts the on screen brightness level For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 286 e Screen timeout adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Selections are 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes and 10 minutes e Smart stay tap this option to disable the screen timeout if your device detects that your face is watching the screen Changing Your Settings 285 286 e Auto rotate screen when enabled the phone automatically switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the phone displays in portrait mode only e Touch key light duration to adjust the light duration of the touch keys e Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font Ch
136. ctivate data usage on your device m Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Use packet data Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks Changing Your Settings 269 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature Access Point Names To access a wireless access point m Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Access point names display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection You can also scan and select a network operator manually or set the network selection to Automatic 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list 2 0 Important You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection Note C
137. d on page 210 Gallery Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in the microSD card For more information refer to The Gallery on page 171 Game Hub Provides a premium one stop service center that let s you play connect and share games on compatible Samsung Android devices For more information refer to Game Hub on page 210 Q Gmail Provides access to your Gmail account Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone For more information referto Using Google Mail on page 143 Google This application makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google For more information refer to Google on page 147 amp Internet Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone For more information refer to Internet on page 238 Kies air Ki Allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone as long as both are on the same Wi Fi network You can now have real time access of your phone through your PC to view
138. d shared content Choose from USB storage phone or SD card Tap Upload from other devices then select the actions you ll take when you upload content from other devices Choose from either Always accept Always ask or Always reject Call Settings To access the Call settings menu __ 1 2 Press and then tap i Phone Press and then tap Call settings Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 2 3 Press and then tap N Phone Press ES and then tap Call settings Tap one of the following options e Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages Auto reject list provides access to current rejection entries and numbers e Set reject messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones Changing Your Settings 277 2 8 Call alert allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration Call vibrations vibrates the phone when the called party answers Call status tones assigns sounds settings during the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on call selects whether alarm and message notification is turned off during a call Call answering ending allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls Answerin
139. d installation instructions Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available music Music aloums and artists are grouped into categories Tap an on screen album to open it and begin playback Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon Music notification icon at the top left of the Application bar Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library 1 From the Home screen tap BEY Apps gt ww Play Music 2 While in a selection or screen tap Gp near the top left of the Application bar or the tab name to back up to the main Music App menu 3 Available tabs include RECENT ARTISTS ALBUMS SONGS PLAYLISTS or GENRES Note The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view depending on the view Multimedia 179 Searching for Music in Your Library 1 From the Home screen tap HE Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Tap Search to search through your available songs 3 Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box 4 Tapa matching song to play it tap a matching album artist or playlist to view a list of its songs Changing Music Settings 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Play Music 2 Press ES and then make a selection e Shuffle all Play all songs in a random order e Settings Pr
140. d the song to a playlist Tap gt P gt Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist Tap the ARTIST name to view songs related to this artist Tap the ALBUM name to view or play other songs on the album The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to control the playback of songs albums and playlists Tap to go back to the previous song Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song Tap to resume playback Tap to pause playback Tap to advance to the next song Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When disabled as shown songs play in the order they appear in List view Also visible when IEA is tapped N When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When enabled songs play in random order Also visible when is tapped Tap to repeat the current song repeat all songs or disable repeat mode Also visible when is tapped MAA K Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap gt Py adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Tap New playlist gt Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist 5 Tap OK to save the new playlist Adding Songs to Playlists 1 From the Home screen tap HA Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list
141. data usage is taken over by your SIM and its network connection 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Advanced gt Keep Wi Fi on during sleep Select an available option e Always maintains your current active Wi Fi connection even during sleep e Only when plugged in maintains the active Wi Fi connection only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply This reduced the drain on your device s battery e Never increase data usage shuts off the current Wi Fi connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network connection Changing Your Settings 265 Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Add network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Wireless Access Point Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID 266 Bluetooth settings In this menu you can activate Bluetooth view or assign a device name activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices ca
142. device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device consult your health care provider For more information see http www fcc gov oet rsafety rf fags html Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion Health and Safety Information 335 or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch
143. dicates the feature is enabled e Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list after selecting the wrong word from the list e Auto substitution list allows you to create a word rule by adding words for automatic substitution during text entry for example youve becomes you ve Scroll up or down to review the current list of word substitutions Tap Add word Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field for example youve Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field for example you tve Tap Done to save the substitution rule 4 Press to return to the previous screen Entering Text 99 Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on screen text You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature 1 From the keypad touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel 2 Tap Select input method 3 Tap Google voice typing 4 Atthe Listening prompt speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking 5 Tap Done when you are finished Note The feature works best when you break your message d
144. e Before using this application you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap EE gt Talk Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 143 2 Begin using Google Talk Note The Network confirms your login and processes This could take up to 5 minutes to complete ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat Share things such as pictures videos animation messages Scribbles audio Contacts Calendar entries and Location information Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as AllShare Play ChatON and Media Hub For more information visit https web samsungchaton com Messages 145 Registering with the Service 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account Note There should be no fs Samsung account icon in the Notifications area of the screen 2 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt gt ChatON 3 Read the on screen notification about data charges and tap OK 4 Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy and read the on screen information Tap Accept to continue 5 Select a country code enter your current phone number to register with the service and tap Done 6 Choose to receive the verification
145. e contact Note Before you can save a contact to the Phone Contact settings must be set to Save new contacts to Phone Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone MobileLife Contacts contacts are stored remotely on the MobileLife servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has been damaged or reset Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account SIM contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry e Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Phone contacts are stored locally on the device Note If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost Add new account lets you create a new account type Choose from Samsung account ChatON Google LDAP Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or MobileLife Contacts Contacts 103 Note When storing an entry into your micro SIM card note that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save t
146. e HotSpot 1 3 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list e The SSID name for your device s hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field e You can change the name by tapping Configure gt Network SSID and changing the entry Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection 208 To change the Portable HotSpot password 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt m Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap Mobile HotSpot gt Configure 3 Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK 4 With security enabled delete the previous password and enter a new one into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings Section 11 Time Management This section describes how you can manage time using time related applications such as the Calendar Alarm Clock Analog or Digital clock and the World clock Calendar With this feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calenda
147. e Play 42 Amazon 42 Calculator 42 205 Calendar 42 Camera 43 206 ChatON 43 Clock 43 Contacts 43 Downloads 44 Dropbox 44 Email 44 209 Flipboard 44 Gallery 44 Game Hub 44 Google Mail 45 210 Google Maps 46 215 Google 45 Hide 41 Internet 45 211 Kies Air 45 Latitude 46 Local 46 Media Hub 46 Messaging 46 messaging 217 Messenger 46 Mobile Hotspot 47 More Services 47 Music Hub 47 Music Player 47 My files 47 My T Mobile 42 Navigation 48 Phone 48 Play Books 48 Play Movies 48 Play Musc 48 Play Store 48 S Memo 49 S Suggest 49 S Voice 49 Samsung Apps 49 Search 49 Settings 49 Sharing with Others 59 Show Hidden 41 Shutting Down 24 Storage Used 291 T Mobile Name ID 49 T Mobile TV 50 Using the Camcorder 164 Using the Camera 150 Video Player 50 235 Visual Voicemail 50 Voice Recorder 50 235 VPN Client 50 YouTube 51 236 Applications and Development 202 Apps Close 234 355 Apps Screen Customizing 41 Area Code Auto Assign 280 Audio Output Mode 310 Auto Redial 280 Auto Reject Configuration 74 Auto Reject List 277 Auto Reject Mode 277 Automatic Answering 278 Automatic Restore 308 B Back up My Account 308 My Data 308 Backup and Restore 308 Battery Charging 13 Display Percentage 15 286 Extending Life 15 Installing 12 Low Battery Indicator 15 356 Removal 12 Wall Charger 13 Battery Cover Removal 8 Replace 9 Battery Life Extending 15 Battery Usage 289 Battery Use amp Safe
148. e President e Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life e AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts 132 Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled To disable Extreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts All alerts are enabled by default checkmark showing 4 Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the checkmark Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap gt 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap Create text template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save Using Email Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient
149. e connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode To pair your device with another Bluetooth device 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the Visibility field shown by the device name Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an external device This is shown by a green check mark Connections 247 3 Tap Scan Your device displays a list of discovered in Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings range Bluetooth devices Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than 4 Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing just functioning as a headphone but also have built in 5 Enter the passkey or PIN code if needed and tap OK microphones for picking up voice Although both functions are detected by the device and activated there might be 6 The external device must accept the connection and o times when you need to change or update these settings for enter your device s PIN code i oe Phone and Media Audio Once successfully paired to an external device e can hear the other person but they can t hear me iS piaye N WE SIAS alee e want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone Note Due to different specifications and features of other
150. e in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place Multi Party calls each multi party call on hold Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that multiple people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about subscribing to this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap the status and deactivate the feature 3 Tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap E The first caller is placed on hold Call Functions and Contacts List 85 Having a Private Conversation With One Participant When you have two Active Conference participants in a multi party Call session it might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are ina multi party call 1 Press and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed Conference call 86 Split Caller Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling feature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature End Call Tap the part
151. e is requesting access to share media with the external source 8 Confirm AllShare Controller enabled appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source Multimedia 193 AllShare Play Screen Sharing via Group Cast Important Verify all of your recipients are connected to the same Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen tap bt Apps gt Ad Gallery 2 Tap gt D AllShare Play Group Cast 3 Enter a security PIN and tap Done This process makes sure only desired recipients can view your shared image 4 Re enter you PIN and tap Done The device then waits for other connected recipients to accept the connection and enter the PIN on their screens or Tap Start Group Cast anyway to continue the process while your users connect You can now interact and draw with the on screen image users will instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact 194 Note The newly altered image with markups and comments can not be saved but you can take a screen shot of the current image and save it to your Clipboard For more information refer to Using Gestures on page 54 AllShare Cast Hub This hardware allows you to enjoy what s currently on your device directly on your TV Note There is no need to be connected to a Wi Fi network or to be logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature AllShare Cast Hub establishes a
152. e on a call switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping Headset off 3 Atthe prompt tap Turn on to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated 84 4 While on a call switch back to the device speaker by tapping Headset on More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contacts list or create a Memo Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap Contacts 2 Browse the Contacts list for the information you need 3 Press to return to the active call Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information a Note 1 Press and then tap Memo 2 Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save e f desired press and select a new memo background color before saving Adjusting Noise Reduction 4 Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a reduction feature Activating this feature can improve the multi party call and display in the order in which they quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise were called 1 Press and then tap Noise reduction off to toggle i the status and activate the feature Important Multiple callers can be joined to a single multi 2 Press and then tap Noise reduction on to toggle party line Additional callers participat
153. e song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song shuffles the current list of songs randomly songs play in order and are not shuffled provides access to the Music square lists the current playlist songs displays the current song in the player window provides access to the Equalizer Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1 From the Home screen tap ii Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Set as gt Phone ringtone Music Player Options The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays m With the Music player application displayed and playing a song press and select one of the following options e Add to quick list adds the current music file to the Quick list e Via Bluetooth scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset e Share music via allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth Dropbox Email Gmail Group Cast Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Add to playlist allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist e Details allows you to view media info such as Artist Title Album Track length Genre Track number Format Size and Location e Set as allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone Calle
154. e the current entry Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact 1 2 From the Home screen tap per and use the on screen keypad to enter a new phone number Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause or Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits Tap Add to Contacts gt Update existing 4 Note This new phone number is then added as a new number to the selected entry 6 Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select the desired target Tap the label button to the left of the new phone number and scroll through the list to select a category type Tap Save to store and update the entry Deleting Contacts Important Once Contacts list entries are deleted they cannot 1 2 be recovered From the Home screen tap 2 Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK Contact List Options iF 2 From the Home screen tap 2 Press The following options display e Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts e Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage location SIM card or SD card you can also send namecards via methods such as Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Merge with Samsung account allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with your ac
155. e to Update 55 Tilt to Zoom 55 Getting Started 7 Battery 12 Battery Cover 8 Locking Unlocking the Device 18 microSD card 11 SIM Card 9 Switching Device On Off 17 Voice Mail 22 Gmail 143 210 Composing a Message 143 Creating an Additional Account 144 Opening 143 Other Options 143 Refreshing 143 Signing In 143 Viewing 144 Google Account Management Settings 292 Account Syncronization 292 Add Account 292 Adding a Sync Account 292 Create New Account 19 Merge Contacts 109 Retrieving Password 19 Set Search Engine 244 Signing into Your Account 19 Voice Typing 92 Google Books 222 Google Docs 228 Google Mail see also Gmail 143 Google Maps Enabling a location source 215 Opening a map 216 Google Music 178 223 Google Places See also Local 214 Google Search Settings 314 Google Talk 50 234 Google Voice Typing Configuring 100 305 Using 101 GPS amp AGPS 329 GPS Tag 153 GPU Force Rendering 313 Group Cast 161 194 209 235 Sharing an Image 162 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 121 Creating a new caller group 121 Deleting 122 Deleting a Caller Group 122 Editing a Caller Group 122 Removing an Entry 121 Settings 122 Gyro Sensor Calibration 286 Gyroscope Calibration 286 361 H Handwriting 94 Haptic Feedback Turn On Off 289 Vibrate 285 Vibration Setting 284 HDR 151 Headset In call Settings 278 Health and Safety Information 317 Hearing Aids 279 Hidden Applictions Show 41 Hold Placing a Call on
156. eck Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt oO Visual Voicemail 2 Tap the voicemail message you want to play 3 Tap Play To delete Visual Voicemail messages 1 From the Home screen tap EHR Apps gt oo Visual Voicemail 2 Tap the voicemail message you want to delete 3 Tap amp Delete gt OK Getting Started 23 Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously with some applications running in the background Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Note The larger the number of applications running on your phone the larger the energy drain on your battery Task Manger Overview m Press and hold Home then tap Task manager This screen contains the following tabs e Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone 24 e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM which displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory c
157. ecognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active 3 Press Psy to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Text to speech output Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available options The default is Google Text to speech 3 Tap Fey to configure the engine s settings 4 Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Speech rate adjusts the rate at which on screen text is spoken by the device Choose from Very slow Slow Normal Fast and Very fast e Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated e Driving mode incoming calls and new notifications are automatically ready out loud In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on Once active tap the Driving mode field to reveal the associated settings Select those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated Choose from Incoming call Message New emails New voicemail Alarm Schedule or Unlock screen Configuring the Mouse TrackPad This feature allows you to configure the pointer
158. ediction predicts the next word you are like to enter A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto append automatically adds predictions to the word you are typing A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto substitution allows the device to automatically replace misspelled or miskeyed words This option reduce typos A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list after selecting the wrong word from the list e Auto substitution list allows you to create a word rule by adding words for automatic substitution during text entry for example youve becomes you ve Scroll up or down to review the current list of word substitutions Tap Add word Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field for example youve 4 Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field for example you fve Tap Done to save the substitution rule Press Psy to return to the previous screen Configure Google Voice Typing 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the s
159. een Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the Current Recipient My Text Er a i i io ip aed Ff gh jy kil top zx cvbam To reply to a text message rm 1 From the Home screen Reply Bubble ap X Text Message Thread 2 While the message is open tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message 128 3 Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your caller s replies are Yellow 4 Tap EX4 Send to deliver your reply or Press and then select one of the available message options page 125 To access message thread options From the main Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options e View contact displays the Contact s Overview page e Add to contact begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list e Delete thread deletes the currently selected message thread To access additional Bubble options Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options e Delete message deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Copy message text copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Lock Unlock message locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted e Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bub
160. eens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions e Press and hold Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item For example press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature for example you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone Touch and hold Press and hold Tap Understanding Your Device 51 e Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example touch an Application icon to open the application A light touch works best e Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example Flick press and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options e Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels e Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target positio
161. ellites to enable the GPS satellite Important To receive better GPS signals avoid using your S device in the following conditions Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and inside a building or between buildings Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate ina tunnel or underground passage places of interest at the street level However this also in poor weather requires a clear view of the sky and uses more battery around high voltage or electromagnetic fields power ina vehicle with tinted windows 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Navigation 2 Read the on screen disclaimer regarding the current release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept 220 Navigation options From the Home screen tap FE Apps gt A Navigation The navigation application can be configured from the main screen If prompted read the on screen disclaimer and tap Accept Choose from the following on screen options e Driving Walking tap to configure the method of travel selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions Driving mode enables the Settings feature allows you to configure your Route options such as Avoid highways or Avoid tolls e Speak Destination allows you to use the voice recognition feature to search for matching locations in your area e Type Destination allows you to manually enter a destination address via the on screen keypad
162. eos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery access Files and remove some of the media files from the folders and then open the Gallery Opening the Gallery m From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt Na Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 160 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery displays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card Viewing a Video within the Gallery 1 From the Home screen tap ERY Apps gt K Gallery 2 Locate your folder and video 3 Tap Play to playback your video For more information on using the Picture in Picture feature for video playback see Using Picture In Picture on page 172 Using the Video Player The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card This device is able to playback DivX videos 1 From the Home screen tap F Apps gt Pj Video Player A list of available videos displays in the Video list 2 Tap a video file to begin viewing Multimedia 171 Sharing Videos 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt DI Video Player After a few seconds each on screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first five seconds of
163. er e Delete Erases selected bookmarks Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options e Open Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark e Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window e Edit bookmark Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 242 e Add shortcut to home Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen e Share link Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Messaging S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Copy link URL Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a message e Delete bookmark Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks on page 242 e Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Connections 241 Adding Bookmarks 1 From the webpage tap gt Add bookmark 2 Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL 3 Assign a folder location Home is the default 4 Tap Save The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to edit 2 Tap Edit bookmark Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL 4 Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation Deleting Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the boo
164. er and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices Important There is no special registration or configuration necessary to playback DRM free DivX movies Registration of your device is only required for playback of protected DivX material Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go was never easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you ve never experienced it before You must have the Samsung Account application installed and registered prior to using Media Hub Note Media Hub usage is based on service availability Important You must be using an active Wi Fi 4G connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as AllShare Play Chat On and Media Hub Creating a New Media Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create an account Enter the required information 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account There should be no icon in the Notifications area of the screen 2 From the Home screen tap EE
165. ere is a green check mark in the field If Ke Missing 911 Address displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide 911 an address for emergency situations e Log into my t mobile com e Click on Profile and edit the Edit customer information e Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Calling Settings Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use by the Wi Fi Calling feature e Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls Tap OK to save the setting Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings Tap Wi Fi Calling to toggle off the feature then tap it again to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network Confirm ke Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar Call Functions and Contacts List 81 2 Confirm f Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the 4 Goto the dialer and make a call Make sure E
166. erest at the street level However this also requires a Clear view of the sky and uses more battery power 294 Security and Lock Screen This menu contains features that allows you to configure the device s security parameters Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as None Swipe Motion Face Face and voice Pattern PIN and Password Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Swipe Using a Motion to Unlock This feature allows you to lock or unlock your device by simply tilting it and moving it either forwards or backwards 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Motion gt OK To unlock a device with motion 1 Verify the device is on and on the Lock screen 2 Ina single motion use your thumb to touch and hold the Lock screen then quickly tilt the device towards you Note If you forget these instructions appear at the bottom of the Lock screen Using Face Unlock This feature used facial recognition to u
167. ervers e Incase of sync conflict allows you to assign the master source on emails If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails Update to device or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly Update to server e Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails The default is 3 auto resends e Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon when new email messages have been received e Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming event is pending e Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending e Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings e Sync email synchronizes emails between your device and the remote exchange server e Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server e Sync calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server e Sync task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server Press to return to the previous page Using Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is Google s web based email When you first setup the phone Gmail is configured Depending on the synchronization settings Gmail is automatically
168. es Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating Health and Safety Information 325 Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids Liquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For Safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized service center 326 Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can poten
169. es You agree that Samsung Electronics Co shall not be responsible or liable directly or indirectly for any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third party application is governed by such third party application provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 11 Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party Applications SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY USE TIMELINESS SECURITY VALIDITY ACCURACY OR RELIABILITY OF OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO IS DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED USE OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DA
170. es and functionality associated Making a Call with making or answering calls and the Contacts list which You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the pie H e contact information SIM card or to the device s memory These entries are Displaying Your Phone Number referred to as the Contacts list m Press gt and then tap Settings gt About 1 Press and then tap is Phone device gt Status Your phone number displays in the 2 Enter the phone number and then tap My phone number field If you make a mistake while dialing tap K to clear Note The device s Settings menu can also be activated by TA A leanne a dai u pressing and then tapping FE Apps gt sequence Settings Note When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings gt Additional settings menu the device automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided your call is not sent to voicemail Note If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device Launching Keypad etc you might be accidentally swiping over the front sensors Call Functions and Contacts List 69 Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 Ina single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Contact tips Quick Calling Quick Te
171. es the time used by one of these on screen clocks e Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen Tap and set both the temperature units F or C and a refresh time 298 e Ripple effect activates deactivates the ripple effect on the lock screen when you tap it e Help text shows help information on the Lock screen e Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake up S Voice e Set wake up command designates your S Voice wake up commands Tap Wake up S Voice and follow the on screen prompts to create a new verbal command Note These options vary depending on the selected Lock settings Using a Visible Pattern When the Make pattern visible option is enabled the device displays the on screen lock grid that is used for unlocking Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Locking Automatically This option allows you to define the amount of time that must pass before the device can automatically lock on its own Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Lock with Power Key When enabled the screen is automatically locked after pressing the Power Lock key Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Vibrate on Screen Tap When enabled you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern using a PIN or password lock Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Ow
172. ess or person find out more information Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map about a business see coupons public responses and more Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your Local Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants map Cafes Bars Attractions or select from available categories 4 Press and select one of the following options such as Entertainment ATMs Gas stations Hotels Post office e Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from or Taxi the map e Layers allows you to switch map views e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic Display allows you to enable disable the Zoom Buttons and conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each Scale Bar color represents how fast the traffic is moving 216 Cache allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Location Settings lets you access and configure the location settings Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it What s New provides access to the Play Store from where you can update the application manually About displays general information about Google map
173. essories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones 320 Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user s hand or in approved body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The sc
174. ethod of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be of pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture enabled prior to use without using email or messaging For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures Pictures on page 158 among a group of users The best example for this feature is having multiple users instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering As each person takes a separate picture with their own device they are all pooled together and instantly appear in each user s Gallery No more Email your pictures to me later Each person walks out of the event with all the pictures taken by everyone This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi Fi Direct active and be paired prior to use 156 Enabling Share Shot Share shot is a Wi Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple users can Wi Fi connect their devices and then all share each others pictures in real time This is really useful in group events ex family gathering or company party where you don t want to have to email everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later date For more information refer to Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings on page 272 The general process is e Enable Wi Fi Direct communication e Pair your device with other users e Enable Share shot To enable Wi Fi Direct 1 Press gt
175. evice is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bending or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device e Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly e When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset e Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result Switch your mobile devi
176. evice to be taken to the top of the current on screen list e Tilt to zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out e Pan to move icon Once enabled touch and hold a desired application shortcut icon or widget on the screen Once it detaches move the device left or right to migrate it to a new location e Pan to browse images Once enabled touch and hold a desired on screen image to pan around it Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on screen image e Shake to update Once enabled shake your device to rescan for Bluetooth devices rescan for Wi Fi devices Refresh a Web page etc e Turn over to mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device over display down on a surface This is the opposite of the pickup to be notified gesture e Palm swipe to capture Once enabled you can capture any on screen information swiping across the screen In a single motion press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right The image is then copied to the clipboard e Palm touch to mute pause Once enabled you can pause any on screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand Once you remove your hand from the screen the device goes back to normal by e
177. ews oews bees 289 Application Manager 0 290 Accounts and Synchronization 291 Location Services 0 eee ee 293 Security and Lock Screen 294 Language and Input Settings 302 Back up and Reset 005 308 ACCESSO evitre se ceuie Oe oe Swe Coe le ed 310 Date and Time 0 0 cee eae 310 Accessibility Settings 005 311 Developer Options 00 312 Google Search Settings 314 About Device 0c c eee eee 315 Section 13 Health and Safety Information 00scccseecesccsssccseeeesesensesneeeeeeees 317 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 317 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 0 0 c cee eee eee 322 FCC Part 15 Information to User 323 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 324 Smart Practices While Driving 324 Battery Use and Safety 325 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 327 UL Certified Travel Charger 328 Display Touch Screen 329 GPS CAGPS fac cdce iin Git cde atte ciamis 329 Emergency Calls 0 00 cceeeeaee 330 Care and Maintenance 331 Responsible Listening 392 6 Operating Environment 334 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 336 Restricting Children s Access to
178. eys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your phone depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the phone s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the device s Settings Getting Started 7 Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart from the rest These are intended to point out important information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts e Important Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventions are used to represent often used steps gt Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedu
179. f on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard e Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration Predictive Text Advanced Settings The predictive text system provides next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field Changing Your Settings 303 304 or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods drag across the icons and select Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen In a single motion touch and slide the Predictive text slider to the right to turn it on JON Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options e Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to complete the word you have started A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered before a word prediction is made Choose from 2 letters 3 letters 4 letters or 5 letters Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the characters of the keys you touched and those of nearby characters A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Next word pr
180. fault or 3x4 keyboard e Input language sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language e Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and hold to access the advanced settings e My words list allows you to add new words to the built in predictive text dictionary Tap Add word and use the keyboard to enter the new word Tap Done to store the new word e T9 Trace like using Swipe allows you to type words by swyping between on screen keys e Handwriting enables the device to recognize on screen handwriting and convert it to text e Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application e Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style e Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen QWERTY keyboard e Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key e Key tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an on screen key e Key tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on screen key e Tutorial launches a brie
181. features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be unlocked by using the new micro SIM card To use this new micro SIM card call or contact T Mobile customer service for more information This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem Getting Started 9 Installing and Removing the SIM card This device uses a different type of SIM card called a micro SIM Other larger SIM cards will not function or fit within this slot To install the SIM card 1 Carefully slide the micro SIM card into the SIM card socket until it clicks into place EA Incorrect Micro SIM card 2 Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the phone and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown 10 To remove the micro SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro SIM slot and push the card slightly out 3 Carefully slide the card out of the micro SIM card socket Note If the card is not inserted correctly the device will not detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the device remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation Installing the microSD Memory Card Your device supports an optional external microSD or microSDHC memory card for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The S
182. fered by your phone Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your Device 1 microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your device 2 micro SIM Card Slot internal Installation location for SIM card 5 3 P 3 External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your phone 4 Camera lens is used to take photos 5 Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions Side Views The following illustration shows the side elements of your Device Understanding Your Device 29 1 Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode with the phone open or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call e Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone 2 Power End key G gt ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states turn the device on or off or Restart Device Display Your display provides information about the device s status and is the interface to manage features The display indicates your connection status signal strength battery status and time Icons display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set The screen also displays notifications and Application or shortcut bar with
183. figure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows ABC 3 Tap a number symbol or emoticon character 4 Tap Eil to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 Tap a to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Tap the appropriate symbol key or Tap EFAJ button to cycle through additional pages e The first number on this key indicates which page 1 2 or 3 of additional characters is active Using Predictive Text The predictive text system provides next letter prediction and regional error correction Note Only available when ABC mode is selected Predictive text advanced settings are available only if the Predictive function is enabled Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods drag across the icons and select Ey Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen Set any of the following options o Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad default or 3x4 keyboard e Input language sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language e Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and hold to access the advanced settings e My words list allows you to
184. five primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging Internet and Apps 30 Signal strength Battery status Connection Status Status Bar 05 OM Time Notification area Status area Home Screen Google search Shortcuts Laer Pett Sih Primary Shortcuts Display settings In this menu you can change various settings for the for the wallpaper cube brightness or backlight m From the Home screen tap Apps gt O Settings gt Display For more information refer to Display Settings on page 285 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength phone battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your phone s display screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see on your device s display and Indicator area Note Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the status of the Notification panel function For more information refer to Accessing Additional Screen Functions on page 37 E G ae beo as Displays your current signal strength The greater the number of bars the stronger the signal Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displa
185. g Electronics Co Ltd Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device For 24 hour information and assistance we offer a new FAQ ARS System Automated Response System at Wwww samsung com us support Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association Openwave is aregistered Trademark of Openwave Inc Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Google Play Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Google Talk Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance Inc Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 9010 Swype Inc All rights reserved DIVX Divx DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video fo
186. g from The Notifications Area 1 Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen 2 This list provides easy access to redial an entry or you can also choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how they are touched Call logs Caller Overview e Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen e Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number e Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry e Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration e Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the current number e Edit number before call press to edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call e Delete press to delete the Contacts entry e Send number press to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient e Add to reject list press to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Call Functions and Contacts List 89 e Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu 90 e
187. g key allows you to press a key to answer the phone The Power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call Auto screen off during calls allows you to force the screen to turn off during an active call Accessory settings for call allows you to assign headset settings during incoming calls Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call Outgoing call conditions configures the connected Bluetooth device to make outbound calls within one of two settings Even when device locked or Only when device unlocked e Use extra vol for calls activating this feature places an extra volume button on your currently active call screen o In call sound EQ settings allows you to configure the audio equalizer used during an active call Choose from either In call sound EQ or Personalized EQ e Increase volume in pocket increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a pocket or a bag Uses the proximity sensor to detect its location e Call forwarding configures call forwarding options e Additional settings allows you to configure additional call settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 280 e Voicemail service allows you to assign the service e Voicemail setting
188. g keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods and select Settings then tap Ey to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen In a single motion touch and slide the Predictive text slider to the right to turn it on ON Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options e Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to complete the word you have started A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered before a word prediction is made Choose from 2 letters 3 letters 4 letters or 5 letters e Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the characters of the keys you touched and those of nearby characters A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto append automatically adds predictions to the word you are typing A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Auto substitution allows the device to automatically replace misspelled or miskeyed words This option reduce typos A green check mark in
189. gs for videos containing restricted content This option blocks these videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t filter Moderate or Strict blocking e About Help provides answers to most YouTube questions Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube Google Mobile Terms of Service YouTube Terms of Service Google Mobile Privacy Policy YouTube Privacy Policy Open source licenses App version displays the software version for the current YouTube application To watch a high quality video m Press and then tap Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile Applications and Development 237 Section 10 Connections Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the web Internet Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser m From the Home screen tap FEA Apps gt amp Internet Note You must disable your Wi Fi connection if you wish to view the web2go home page http home web2go com 238 Navigating with the Browser 1 Tap an entry to select an item 2 Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to scroll through a website 3 To return to a previous page tap 4 To move forward to a web page tap Browser Options 1 From the top of t
190. gt Settings _ or Press gt and then tap Settings The Settings screen displays Wi Fi Settings This section describes the Wi Fi settings For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 253 264 Activating Wi Fi 1 Press gt and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on BN The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your device automatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile services m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Advanced Configure the settings as desired The available Wi Fi connection are displayed with a security type displayed next to them Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Advanced Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature Wi Fi During Sleep By default when your device enter a sleep mode your Wi Fi connection stays on all the time If the feature is Never enabled during sleep that current
191. h 17 Operating Environment 334 Organizer Calculator 205 World Clock 262 Other Downloads 207 Other Important Safety Information 339 Out of Office Message 141 Settings 141 Outlook 133 synchronizing 293 365 Overview Home Screen 38 Owner Information 299 P Passwords Make Visible 300 Pause Adding to a Contact 108 Pause Dialing 75 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 324 Personalized EQ 278 Phone Icons 31 Switching on off 17 Phone number Finding 69 Phone Ringtone 284 Phone Vibration 284 Photo Editor Download and Install 169 Photos Options 155 161 168 Sharing 155 161 168 366 Picture Set As 163 Sharing via Group Cast 162 Streaming from Gallery 162 Picture In Picture 172 Pictures Instant Sharing 157 Sharing 156 158 Play Books 222 Play Music 223 Play Store 223 Quick Access 41 Play Videos Picture In Picture 172 Pointer Speed Configuration 307 Power 37 Auto Adjust Screen Tone 286 Power Saving 37 Background Color 289 CPU Power 288 Haptic Feedback 289 LCD Adjustment 286 Learning About 289 Screen Power 289 Power Saving Mode 288 Predictive Text Activation 98 304 Using 98 Using XT9 97 Prepend Area Code 281 Primary Shortcuts 40 Adding and Deleting 61 Customizing 61 Replacing 61 Q Quick Dialing 70 Quick Messaging 125 R Recently used Applications Accessing 57 Redialing the last number 76 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 320 Reject Call
192. h 66 Mounting the 66 Unmounting 67 Search Settings 314 Search Engine 244 Sending a Namecard 114 Setting an alarm 261 368 Setting up Voicemail 22 Settings 264 Accessing 264 Browser 243 Contact list 120 Display 31 Enabling the GPS Satellites 294 Enabling Wireless Locations 293 Messaging 130 Wallpaper 63 64 Setup Initial 16 Severe Alert Disable 132 Share Applications 59 Share Shot 151 157 Configuring 158 Enabling 157 Stop Sharing 158 Taking Images 158 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 60 Adding from Home Screen 60 Deleting from a Screen 61 Managing 59 Primary 40 SIM Micro 7 10 see also micro SIM 10 SIP Add Accounts 279 see Internet Calls 279 Slideshow Settings 160 Smart Alarm 262 Smart Practices While Driving 324 Smart Stay 285 Snooze 262 Repeat 261 SNS 118 Social Network Adding Facebook Contacts 119 Resync 119 Social Networking Adding Contacts From 118 Software Update 315 Song Set As 185 Sound Profiles 283 Sounds Turn Off All 312 Speakerphone Turning on and off 84 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 322 Speed Dial Changing an entry 77 Making a call 78 Removing an entry 78 Setting up entries 77 Standard Limited Warranty 341 Status Bar 31 Strict Mode 313 Sub Menus Navigation 56 SugarSync Setup 191 Switching to a Bluetooth During a call 84 SWYPE see also T9 Trace 93 System Manager 16 309 System Tone Settings 285 Systeme Volume 283 T T9 Trace 93 97
193. hanged from Hi Galaxy to anything else For more information refer to Samsung Unlock Options on page 298 6 Tap Speak if the device does not hear you or to give it a command Example 1 e want to find the best pizza online e Tap and say Find me the best Pizza This launches an Internet search Example 2 e want to find the nearest gas station e Tap and say Find me the nearest gas station This launches the Map application and indicates where these are in relation to your current position Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new ISIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Note Wi Fi Calling cannot be used at the same time as AllShare Cast Hub The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following e Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current in home coverage experience e Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi Fi signal available Important A new micro SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Note This feature is active by default If you are in an active Wi Fi call and go out of range of your Wi Fi the call w
194. hanging the Background Wallpapers the main Home screen Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later To add a screen 1 Press gt and then tap Edit page Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged 2 Tap Add screen ee eS Ct The newly added Spe eT day a ee te a ee EOT OEN screen appears as the last page Important Your phone can only contain at most seven screens PP pag l and at least one screen 3 Press to return to the main Home screen 58 Rearranging the Screens 1 Press gt and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen position 1 and bottom right is screen last screen Assigning a New Home Screen 1 Press gt and then tap Edit page 2 Tap O Home screen The new Home screen then indicates this icon in the upper right Sharing an App The device s Applications menu now comes with a feature that allows you to share information about your selected applications with external users 1 Press and then tap HE Apps 2 Press and then tap Share apps 3 Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to share information about and tap Done Note Shared applications consist of those that have previously been downloaded from the Play Store 4 Select a sharing method Choose from Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google
195. hare Cast screen and locate the current connection 2 Tap the entry and select End connection To reconnect your device again to an existing hub 1 Locate the AllShare Hub dongle name displayed at the bottom of the TV showing the tutorial Ex Name Dongle XXXXXX Important Verify the LED is not a solid blue This indicates there is another device currently connected 2 Access your device s AllShare Cast screen and tap the same hub dongle name in the list 3 Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and device show the same image screen AllShare Cast Hub Troubleshooting Connections e f this is the first time you are connecting your device to a hub and the connection fails e Press the RESET button for 1 second until it turns solid BLUE e Quickly tap the dongle name from within your device s AllShare cast screen Note This process is similar to initially pairing a Bluetooth device e f you have already successfully paired another device and you are trying to connect another device e Only one device can be paired and in use at a time with the hub e From the previously connected device s AllShare Cast screen tap the connection and select End connection e f you can t find the previous device Press and hold the RESET button on the back of the hub for about FOUR seconds until the LED begins to blink RED Access your new device s AllShare Cast screen and rescan for the existing hub dongle
196. hat Contact into your phone s onboard memory 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Tap to create a contact Note You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact Continue with step 3 3 Tap a destination type MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phone depending on where you want to save the new contact information 4 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad e Tap V to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix 104 5 Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Picture or Take picture Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Home Mobile Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Car Company Main MMS Radio Assistant Other Callback or Custom 7 Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number e Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Email
197. hat allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Connections 245 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider Bluetooth Settings to the right to turn it on JON The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of The slider color indicates the activation status When the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service active displays in the Status area including To turn Bluetooth off e Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth 1 Press gt and then tap Settings communication and description 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other to the left to turn it off KOAA Bluetooth devices Bluetooth Status Indicators e Displaying your device s Bluetooth address The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status To access the Bluetooth Settings menu at a glance 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Displays when Bluetooth is active Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by BEO Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and 3 Press and tap the Device name Visible time out rp communic
198. he browser screen select one of the available options e Navigation use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your browsing activity e Refresh reloads the current page e Bookmarks provides access to the Bookmarks screen e Windows displays a list of the windows you have open or From the home page press to access the following options e New window launches a new browser window By default this screen shows the web2go home page e Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list e Add shortcut to home creates a shortcut to the web2go Home page and then places it on an open area on an available extended screen e Share page allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message e Find on page allows you to search in the current page e Desktop view allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a Desktop computer e Save for offline reading allows you to store the current page in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection e Downloads displays the download history e Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers e Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options See Browser Settings on page 243 Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on
199. he recording and save the video file to your Camera folder 9 Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer then tap Play to playback your video for review 10 Press to return to the viewer Note Zooming is not supported while recording Full HD video Adjust to a lower resolution to regain this functionality Multimedia 165 Camcorder Options You can change options using your keypad in capture mode The following short cuts are available 166 Self portrait allows you to activate the front facing camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Recording mode allows you to set the recording mode to Normal whichis limited only by available space on the destination location Limit for MMS which is limited by MMS size restrictions Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video Options include None Negative Black and white Sepia Washed out Cold vintage Warm vintage Posterize Solarize Blue point Green point or Red yellow point Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Self recording allows you to set the front camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to
200. hen tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Locate and tap the corporate email account Tap O within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 Place a check mark adjacent to those events you wish to manually sync 5 Tap Sync now to synchronize those enabled parameters 6 Press to return to the previous screen Location Services The Location services allows you to configure the device s location services Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location Changing Your Settings 293 Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite Enabling the Location and Google Search 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Location and Google search to enable the GPS satellite Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of int
201. hen used in conjunction with HSPA 4G data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Apps gt Important The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when device is connected to Wi Fi Please disconnect your Wi Fi connection prior to active this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 From the Home screen tap 9 Mobile HotSpot or Press gt E gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Apps gt 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on ON 3 Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK 4 Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK Enter a new password then write it down Tap Save to store the new settings Confirm the Mobile HotSpot icon appears at the top of the screen Se Nog Note By default the connection is not secured Connections 257 Note Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery much faster The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger To connect to th
202. http www who int peh emf en e International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection http www icnirp de e Health Protection Agency http www hpa org uk Topics Radiation Health and Safety Information 321 e US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation EmittingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body 322 expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless
203. i Disabled Click to enable connection to navigate to the Wi Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi Fi if it is not already enabled For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 253 3 If prompted with the Improve My Location screen tap Settings to configure the necessary settings or Skip to continue on without making a change 4 Tap MAP VIEW to return to the main application 212 Sharing your Location with Friends 1 From the map view if not already displaying the Latitude icon at the top tight tap the bottom right arrow from gt Join Latitude to display your Latitude friends At first only your name is displayed 2 From the bottom of the Latitude map screen tap FRIENDS LIST gt Add friends Tap Add friends 3 Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address 4 Tap acontact or enter an email address then tap Add friends 5 Tap Yes at the Send sharing requests prompt 6 Your friend will receive an email or text message with your location marked on a map They will also receive instructions on how to view your location from the web or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is available Once they acknowledge your request their location will display on your device They can share their location from their computer phone or tablet For more information go to http www google com latitude To view the map tap MAP VIEW Latitude Options From the Latitude map scree
204. i Fi network screen tap Add network 2 Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point 3 Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure 5 Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Note No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network The WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default settings Deactivating Wi Fi 1 Press gt E and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the left to turn it off OFF Activate and Deactivate Wi Fi from the Notification bar Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times Manually Scan for a Wi Fi Network 1 Press gt E and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on JON 3 Tap Scan Wi Fi Advanced Settings The Wi Fi settings Advanced menu allows you to set up many of the device s Wi Fi services including e Setting the Wi Fi sleep policy e Viewing the device s MAC Address Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP Connections 255 To access the Wi Fi Advanced Settings menu m Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Advanced U
205. ication coverage Bluetooth 4G 3G Wi Fi communication battery levels GPS etc Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets e Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the five Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white Square Up to seven 7 total screens are available Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap Voice Actions to launch the function from within this Google widget Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens Home or extended e Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Voice talk Contacts Phone Email Play Store etc These function the same as shortcuts on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can a
206. ice This includes games news reference social networking navigation and more Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 20 1 From the Home screen tap ka Samsung Apps 2 If prompted read the on screen disclaimer and agree to the information 3 Follow the on screen instructions Apps gt Applications and Development 229 Search Use Google Search to search the Web m From the Home screen tap aa Apps gt gg Search and enter the search text or Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone o From the Home screen tap EES Apps gt Settings or Press gt 3 and then tap Settings For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 264 230 T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap En Apps gt 4D T Mobile Name 1D 2 Choose an on screen option T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand m From the Home screen
207. ice 284 Intensity Setup 284 Video Volume 283 Video Player Picture In Picture 172 Sharing Videos 172 Videos Default Storage Location 167 Options 155 Vlingo 306 Voice Commands For Apps 305 Voice Control Alarm 305 Camera 306 Incoming Calls 305 Music 306 Voice Controls Activation 305 Voice Input Recognition 306 Voice mail Accessing 22 Accessing from another phone 22 Setting up 22 Voice Recognizer 306 Voice Search 306 Voice Typing 92 Configuring 100 305 Using 101 Voicemail 282 Volume Settings Adjusting 283 VPN Adding 274 Settings 274 VPN Client 236 W Wait 76 108 Adding to a Contact 108 Wait dialing 76 Wallpaper Home and Lock Screens 63 Wallpapers Assigning from Gallery 161 Changing Home Screen 63 Changing Lock Screen 64 Changing via Settings Menu 63 Managing 63 Warranty Information 341 Weather Setting 298 Web 238 History 242 Web applications enable downloading 250 Web Scripts Install 312 Widgets Adding and Removing 62 Google Talk 50 Moving to a Different Screen 62 Settings 49 230 Stopwatch 263 Wi Fi About 253 Activating 80 253 264 Advanced settings 255 Calling 79 Connecting to 254 Deactivating 255 Direct Connection 272 During Sleep 265 Manually Adding Network 266 Manually scan for network 255 Off 255 On 254 255 264 Settings 264 Show Usage 268 Status icons 254 Wi Fi Calling 9 Activating 80 275 Connection Preferences 81 276 Icons 82 Launching 81 Settings 81 276 Wi Fi Direct 272
208. ice to slow down e Turn off any streaming services after use see Running Services e Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Initial Device Configuration 1 Select a language from the associated field English is the default language 2 Tap Start Note You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is completed 3 Choose to either Sign in to your existing Google account Get an account by creating a new one or Not now to continue 4 Select deselect the desired Google location services and tap Next 16 5 If prompted to enable purchases enter your credit card information and click Save Click Skip to continue without entering this information 6 Select your Backup and Restore settings by placing a check mark alongside the associated field and tap Next 7 Enter a First and Last name then tap Next This will help to identify this as your device 8 Read and agree to the Google services notice by tapping Next 9 Tap Finish to complete the setup process 10 Follow the on screen tutorials to learn how to navigate the screens Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power 11 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with
209. icipant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold To return to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other Dropping One Participant 1 Press Lea and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant 3 Tap fim to end your conversation with the remaining caller Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 280 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress 1 Ina single motion touch and slide it in any direction to answer the new incoming call 2 Tap an option from the Accept call after menu e Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call e Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom
210. ientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a Cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF Safety Program http www fcc gov oet rfsafety Environmental Protection Agency EPA http www epa gov radtown wireless tech html Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http www osha gov SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive e National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH http www cdc gov niosh World Health Organization WHO
211. iewing a Gmail Message 1 144 From the Gmail Inbox tap a message to view the following options located at the bottom of the screen e Archive archives the selected Email e Delete deletes the currently selected Email e Labels G assigns a label to the current Email e Mark as Unread Se tags the current message as unread and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox e Newer swiping to the right displays newer Emails e Older swiping to the left displays older Emails Press to select one of the following additional options e Mark important assigns the current email an important status e Mute mutes the conversation e Report spam reports the Email message as spam e Settings allows you to configure the General or Notification settings e Help launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information e Send feedback sends feedback to Google Creating an Additional Gmail Account From the Home screen tap BH gt m Gmail 2 Press es and then tap Settings gt ADD ACCOUNT and follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section For more information refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 143 Google Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts Not
212. ified device AllShare Cloud connectivity enabled via the use of an external Web storage service AllShare Group Cast screen sharing e Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub 8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital zoom e 1 9 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat Share Shot picture sharing functionality e S Beam and Android Beam file transfer technology e Share Shot camera sharing capable via multi connect Wi Fi Direct connection e Bluetooth enabled e NFC tag compatible e Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail YouTube Google Maps Google Voice Search Understanding Your Device 25 Multiple Messaging Options Text Picture Video Messaging and Instant Messaging with Windows Live Messenger Google Talk and Yahoo Messenger Corporate and Personal Email e Music Player with multitasking features e Pre loaded e reader applications such as Play Books e Assisted GPS Google Navigation e Webkit based browser e Expandable memory slot supports up to 64GB microSD e Mobile HotSpot Capability e USB Tethering capable e T Mobile TV e Video Chat via Google Talk e Google Play Music Compatibility with a new micro SIM card e Wi Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media Hub 26 e HD Video Player 1080p Codec MPEG4 H 264 H 263 VC 1 WMV7 8 VP8 MP43 Format 3GP MP4 WMV ASF
213. ill be dropped Call Functions and Contacts List 79 Activating Wi Fi 1 Press gt and then tap Settings 2 Locate the Wi Fi field and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on ON J The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Select a Wi Fi network from the list of available networks Follow the on screen instructions to complete connection lt gt Wi Fi Connected Y Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP D Wi Fi Communication Issue e Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off 80 Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Important If you are not using a new ISIM card you will receive an Error ERO5 Invalid SIM message You must be using a new ISIM card to use this feature Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar e f prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt and tap Done 2 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Calling The feature is active when th
214. ine review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection e Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize Choose from Automatic All 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month e Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account s trash bin remotely e Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule e Out of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events Choose from 2 weeks 1 month 3 months 6 months or All calendar Messages 141 142 e Security options allows you to enable several security options such as Encryption Encryption algorithm Sign Sign algorithms Email certificates and Security policy list These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Security policy list lists the current email s security policy These policies could restrict some functions from corporate s
215. ing pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time e In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis after the Media Content has been rented e g if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty four 24 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window e You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub through any output on your mobile phone including All Share Multimedia 177 Play Movies This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Choose from thousands of movies including new releases and HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android phone or tablet Movies previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies 1 178 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ERNE Play Movies Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list Following the on screen instructions for renting and view
216. ing movies Tap the MY RENTALS tab to view movies you have rented Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your phone or memory card For more information on using the Picture in Picture feature for video playback see Using Picture In Picture on page 172 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m Access the new music tab from within your Play Store application The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap FEA Apps gt GP Play Music The Music app searches both your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application It then displays a Carousel view of your new and recent music organized by album If prompted follow the on screen instructions to link your current account to Google Play Music Tap an on screen account to add it or select Add account to use a new account Atthe free songs screen select either Get free songs or Skip e Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play store e Follow the on screen download an
217. ings Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power The amount of time the battery was used also displays Battery usage displays in percentages per application 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Battery The battery level displays in percentage 2 From the upper right tap Refresh to update the list or Tap an entry to view more detailed information Note Other applications may be running that affect battery use Changing Your Settings 289 Application Manager This device can be used for Android development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the device for development Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk This menu allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager gt All 290 Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have do
218. ion is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided Tip To open applications quickly add the icons of frequently used applications to one of the Home screens For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 57 You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens If you add an application as a primary shortcut the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications menu For more information refer to Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts on page 61 202 Applications The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the phone Access T Mobile This application provides you online access to account information such as your current activity billing information service plans downloads and other information Note Wi Fi connection must be disabled prior to use this application requires use of a T Mobile network connection 1 From the Home screen tap f Access T Mobile 2 Scroll to the bottom of the application screen and select one of three available options e My Account provides access to account specific features such as Bill Cycle start date Usage and Detailed usage information e Billing provides details about your current billing summary Apps gt e Plans amp Services provides about both your current plan other avai
219. ired on screen motion option The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures OO a Tilt to Zoom In Zoom Out lt 54 Direct call Once enabled the device will dial the currently displayed on screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear Smart alert Once enabled pickup the device to be alerted and notified of you have missed any calls or messages Double tap to top Once enabled double tap the top of the device to be taken to the top of the current on screen list e Tilt to zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out e Pan to move icon Once enabled touch and hold a desired application shortcut icon or widget on the screen Once it detaches move the device left or right to migrate it to a new location Pan to browse images Once enabled touch and hold a desired on screen image to pan around it Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on screen image e Shake to update Once enabled shake your device to rescan for Bluetooth devices rescan for Wi Fi devices Refresh a Web page etc Turn over to mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface This is the oppos
220. is retinere iii 117 Wi Fi Calling 0 0 0 cece eee 79 Adding more Contacts via Accounts In Call ODUONS cove des cna ced atecsegad mee 82 and SYNC xaute oc ew eee sons eee ees 118 Logs Tab cee ete see ween nes ee eee 88 Additional Contact Options 120 Section 5 Entering Text cssssssnees 92 GIOUDS s sas fc ts 0 5 8 Gnd aah eae en ee 121 Text Input Methods 0 92 The Favorites Tab 2422 3 ee ysenenen sues 122 Selecting the Text Input Method 92 Entering Text Using T9 Trace 93 Section 7 Messages ssssssssssnsssnnnnnsnnnnns 123 PHO dO 24 ca 2cnt4antsere0es4 cine 169 Types of Messages 0 005 123 The Gallery 0 0 0 cece eee 171 Creating and Sending Messages 124 Using the Video Player 171 Message Options 0 125 Media Hub 0000 175 Viewing Newly Received Messages 127 Play Movies 2 atu thee howe ease eee ee 178 Deleting MessageS 000 129 Play MUSIC o3 0 353 2508250 ab0cacnaeee 178 Message Search 0 0e0e 130 Music Player 00s eee e eee 184 Messaging Settings 6 130 Using Playlists 02 0 0 ceca 186 Text Templates 0 00 cae 132 Creating a Playlist u nan nanana 186 Using Email n on atm nie are aia ee ace 133 Transferring Music Files 187 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook
221. ite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture e Palm swipe to Capture Once enabled you can capture any on screen information swiping across the screen In a single motion press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right The image is then copied to the clipboard Palm Swipe to Screen Capture Understanding Your Device 55 e Palm touch to mute pause Once enabled you can pause any on screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand Once you remove your hand from the screen the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound Menu Navigation You can tailor the device s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your device defaults with seven screens Navigating Through the Application Menus There are three default Application Menu screens available As you add more applications from the Play Store more screens are created to house these new apps 1 Press and then tap EA Apps The first Application Menu screen displays e To close the Applications screen press Home 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus Tap any of the on screen icons to launch the associated application 56 Using Sub Menus Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press l A sub men
222. ither continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Power saving In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on SON Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve power e CPU power saving allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU e Screen power saving allows you to lower the screen power level e Background color allows you to change the background color on email and internet to save power e Turn off haptic feedback allows you to turn off vibration when you tap or touch the screen 4 Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various ways to conserve battery power 5 When the power gets low confirm appears at the top of the screen This indicates the power saving mode is active SD Card amp Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 65 To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and SD card head
223. kmark you want to delete 2 Tap Delete bookmark 3 At the confirmation window tap OK 242 Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your device at any time 1 From an active Web page press and then tap Settings gt Privacy and security Clear all cookie data 2 Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit Using Web History The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the webpage tap gt History tab 2 Selecta visited range category Choose from Today Yesterday or Most visited 3 Tap an entry to display the webpage or Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list Using Most Visited The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and bookmarked websites These entries are used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the webpage tap gt History gt Most visited tab A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list 2 Tap any entry to display the selected webpage Browser Setting
224. lable plans and other related services e Other T Mobile Links provides links to other T Mobile related information e Settings amp Support provides access to Settings options ex My Downloads MobileLife More for Me Settings and Terms amp Condition information AllShare Play This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer AllShare Definitions AllShare AllShare Play AllShare Play Group Cast This uses the traditional DLNA technology for sharing multimedia photos videos or music to your Samsung Smart TV and other DLNA devices This new feature builds on the previous AllShare feature It includes features such as Web storage integration and social networking integration This is a Web service that requires using aSamsung account A subset feature of AllShare Play this allows you to mirror photos and multimedia presentations with other members of your current Wi Fi group Users must be on the same Wi Fi and provide an access code to join the group
225. lackilist Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen page 111 3 Press and then tap Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list 1 From the Home screen tap N 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection gt Auto reject list 3 Tap Create and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list 4 Tap Save to complete the assignment International Calls 1 From the Home screen tap K and then touch and hold Do until the device shows on screen 2 Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number 3 If you make a mistake tap C once to delete a single digit 4 Touch and hold C to delete all digits 5 Tap Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers e 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second pause This is indic
226. lect TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable i 2 3 Press and then tap KI Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt TTY mode Tap TTY Full TTY HCO or TTY VCO to activate the feature or TTY Off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Changing Your Settings 279 HAC Mode This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility for this device 1 Press and then tap iv Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings 3 Tap the Hearing aids field to activate the feature green check mark or tap it again to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 Press and then tap R Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings 3 Tap one of the following options e Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number e Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc e Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call 280 e Auto redial aut
227. lect a location on TOR aoe chee ea el a pay Pelee ise Pane poe Os A ES Ck Ly parci Des RD ere Sasirreties Cefa ITET Th RA Aon de amp y boa a Ea a ri T rmi a aha bo eiaha e Carmi a l ar iioa aiioa Pac Berit Roen Fal your com puter to Choos E rara Foe poar cheno O EIC mele rarer ra Prov rummy Leig Ficars DVD Player download the DivX registration video a with the same title as your device nickname ex Pat divx Follow the on screen instructions to download the file and initiate the transfer process You will need to place this video file onto your device and play it back 8 10 11 12 Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this video For more information refer to Communicating with the SD card on page 66 From the Registration screen Transfer click Transfer Video now and select the location of the microSD card or USB the device as the target destination for the registration video created in step 6 and click Start or Locate the created file copy and paste it into the new drive letter corresponding to your device s storage location From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt My files Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play it Once you play the registration file on your device your registration is complete Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen from within your computer s DivX Player and confirm both your comput
228. lenced and Silent mode is set to Vibrate For more information refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 283 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds are silenced and Silent mode is set to Mute Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled Understanding Your Device 33 Se BEE amp 34 Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and there is an available open and visible bluetooth device Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress Displays when a file or application download is in progress Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync d between your device and an external Web storage location Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was successfully delivered Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being shared via Wi Fi Direct For more information referto Camera Options on page 151 a lpn Lv Es i JE Displays when ascreen capture has been taken and stored in the clipboard For more information refer to Using Gestures on page 54 Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and i
229. lkBack to activate the feature Note TalkBack when installed and enabled speaks feedback to help blind and low vision users Important TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter except passwords including personal data and credit card numbers It may also log your user interface interactions with the device Changing Your Settings 311 9 Tap the Install Web scripts gt Allow to activate deactivate the feature which allows some applications to install scripts from Google that makes the Web site s content more accessible 10 Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of on screen colors from White text on a Black background to Black text on a White background 11 Tap the Font Size field to change the size of the fonts used on the device within menus options etc Choose from Tiny Small Normal Large or Huge 12 Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud earphone 13 Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps selections notifications etc 14 Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action Choose from Short Medium or Long 312 Developer Options Use the Developer options to set options for application development m Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer options Important These features are used for development purposes
230. llection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature Changing Your Settings 309 Accessory This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the device is docked i 310 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Accessory Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing the phone from the dock Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home screen when the phone is docked Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or Surround Tap Audio applications to create a checkmark if you want to enable audio applications in the quick panel Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Date and time 2 Tap Automatic data and time to allow the network set the date and time Important Deactivate Automatic data and time to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 4 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set 5 Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 7 Tap Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the device autom
231. llow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not connect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices e Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket e Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical
232. loads or Other downloads and select the desired file Dropbox Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from your device This applications allows you to bring your files with you when you re on the go edit files in your Dropbox from your device upload photos and videos to Dropbox and share your selected files freely with family and friends The in device application works in conjunction with a partner program placed on a target computer using an active Internet connection Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its contents across all of your connected devices on your account Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer and its automatically updated to the same folder on your other devices Applications and Development 207 Download the Desktop application 1 Use your computer s browser to navigate to http www dropbox com 2 Follow the on screen setup and installation instructions on your target computer containing the desired files Important The computer application must be installed on the computer containing the desired files This computer must have an active Internet connection Note It might be necessary to configure your router s firewall settings to allow this application to gain access to the Internet 208 Accessing Dropbox on your Device 1 From the Home screen tap E Apps gt gt gt Dropbox gt Start 2 Tap I m already a Dropbox user enter you
233. location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To send and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard POP3 Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POP3 is the current standard Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization Messages 133 Creating an Internet Email Account 1 From the Home screen tap HE Apps gt xy Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add new account Account name EY Loading messages Access available accounts and folders Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Internet email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive 134 Tap Show passw
234. lock This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring ata specified time track time in other parts of the world use a stopwatch or set a timer m From the Home screen tap FEA Apps gt G Clock Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Clock 2 Tap Create alarm 3 Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected 4 Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are day blocks or Repeat weekly Selected day blocks turn blue when active 5 Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following Melody Vibration Vibration and melody or Briefing Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following Sounds or Go to My files Locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and Snooze repeat 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times e Duration indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time e Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned
235. lso be found within the Applications screens Understanding Your Device 39 The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Apps from the Primary shortcuts area Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times e Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone N launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Favorites and Contacts Contacts Eq launches the Contacts related screens Phone Groups Contacts and Favorites Messaging launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Internet launches the built in Web browser Apps toggles functionality between the Home and Application screens e Tap Apps to access the Application screens loaded with every available local application e While in the Applications screens tap Back to easily return to the Home screen 40 As you transition from screen to screen a screen indicator located at the bottom displays the currently active panel Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen the following menu options are available e Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home screen and six Extended screens Create folder allows you to create o
236. lthough the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the following e Support needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones e Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and e Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns Health and Safety Information 319 The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure e Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone e Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn acc
237. ly stored on your services servers 3 If this is your first time to use the service set up a new account by tapping Sign up gt SugarSync Sign Up Multimedia 191 Note If you already have a current Sugar Sync account tap Sign in 4 Enter in your Email address and your password 5 Agree to the terms of service and tap Sign up or Go on your on screen keyboard Important After you enter your passwords do not press to hide the keyboard This action erases the password fields 6 You can choose to download the SugerSync app or tap Skip to continue 7 Once the process is successfully completed the Web storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main screen 192 Sharing files via Web Storage Files can be uploaded to a Web storage location such as SugerSync by either login into the service and sharing a folder on your computer with the storage location or sharing files images and videos from your device To upload an image on your device to Web storage 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt Na Gallery 2 Select a folder location ex Camera and open an image by tapping it once This opens the image in the preview window Note To select multiple images touch and hold an image to place a colored border around the selected images 3 Tap a from the top of the Gallery screen The device then confirms the available storage locations and begin the process of uploading the selected images
238. mail messages 1 2 From the Home screen tap FY gt Email Select an email account e f you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Select an available email account Tap T Refresh Composing Email 1 2 From the Home screen tap EE gt Email Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Tap Inbox gt JZ Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e f you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press and then tap Add Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients e Use the Ce field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject Tap the email text field and compose your email message e To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap gt to delete the attached file Messages 135 Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK 8 Once complete tap Esa Send Configuring Email
239. me Menu and Back Home Key The Home key takes you back to your Home screen 4 of the 7 available screens m Press and hold to launch the Recent apps Task manager screen For more information refer to Accessing Recently Used Applications on page 57 Menu Key The Menu key E activates an available menu function for the current screen or application Back Key The Back key returns you to the previously active screen If the on screen keyboard is currently open this key closes the keyboard 38 Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your phone There are initially seven available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Signal strength Battery status Connection Status Notification area Status area Home Screen Google search Shortcuts E i ia weet Primary TT EEE shoris Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection Emails and Text MMS messages These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar page 36 e Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as commun
240. me screen tap HA Apps gt F Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the Image viewer Touch and drag a picture to the left to see the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture Tap the on screen image and use either of the following image menu options e Share via oe allows you to share the picture via Group Cast ChatON Dropbox Flipboard Picasa Google S Memo Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging Gmail or Email AllShare Group Cast gt allows to share images directly with other Wi Fi connected participants via Group Cast Slideshow gt allows you to see your photos in a Slideshow or access the slideshow settings Configure the Slideshow settings Effect Music and Speed then tap Start to begin the playback o Delete ful allows you to delete the current picture Press to select additional options Face tag allows you add embedded tag information about those in your image Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a counterclockwise direction Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the current picture Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Discard to ignore any changes Edit launches the photo editor appli
241. n Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling Swipe or slide and Drag Rotate 52 e Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to zoom out Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to zoom in Pinch Zoom Out Spread Zoom In Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 57 Motion Navigation and Activation The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 287 Understanding Your Device 53 Using Gestures By activating the various gesture features within the Motion menu page 287 you can access a variety of time saving functions To activate motion 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation 2 Activate the feature by tapping the Motion activation field 3 Tap the des
242. n e T9 Trace as part of the Samsung keyboard and not shown as an input method is also enabled as you swipe across the on screen keyboard Instead of tapping each key use your finger to trace over each letter of a word 92 The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default and select an input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen 2 Tap Select input method and select an available input method Entering Text Using T9 Trace Using the Samsung Keyboard T9 Trace is the built into the Samsung keyboard This method This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus Portrait or landscape orientation The only difference from letter to letter lifting your finger between words T9 between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys Trace uses error correcting algorithms and a language model From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone to predict the next word and includes a touch predictive text counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen system QWERTY keyboard display
243. n is shown in the upper left display select either e FRIENDS LIST allows you to access and edit your current Freinds list or From the Latitude map press and select one of the following e Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map e Search allows you to search for a place of interest e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point e Layers allows you to switch map views Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain with the current map location Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your map Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share your location with them My Maps cisplays a list of your preferred maps Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map Applications and Development 213 e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Display allows you to enable disable the Zoom Buttons
244. n discover it or scan for other available Bluetooth devices with which to pair For more information refer to Bluetooth on page 245 Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 2 Press gt and then tap Settings In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on ON The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 2 Press gt and then tap Settings In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off OFF Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Activating the Device Name 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by BON 3 Press and tap the Device name The assigned device name displays 4 Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 5 Tap OK to confirm your setting Activating Visibility 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify your Bluetooth is active From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 From the bottom of the Blue
245. n screen folders to help organize files of application shortcuts Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term online Settings provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping EE gt Settings Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the three panels on the Applications screens Important Once you log into your Google account All previously downloaded apps should now be populated within the Application screens Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen the following menu options are available 1 2 Press and then tap EEE Apps Press f and then select from the following options e Play Store provides quick access to the Play Store page 223 e Edit allows you to add a new folder to the Application screen and then drag drop an existing application into it This feature requires the view be set to Customizable view e Uninstall allows you to uninstall a user downloaded application Only those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded Tap O to remove the selected app e Downloaded applications allows you to filter the view of apps to only those applications that you have downloaded e View type allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is shown page
246. n up for Camera or down for Camcorder Storage location Charge Status indicates the current storage location Phone or Card and the charge state of the device i Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video you can access various options Photo viewing options 1 Tap a thumbnail to view the picture Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 2 The following options are available at the top of the screen e Slideshow gt allows you to see your photos in a Slideshow e Share via cS allows you to share the picture via Group Cast ChatON Dropbox Flipboard Picasa Google S Memo Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging Gmail and Email o Delete ful allows you to delete the current picture Video viewing options Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 1 Tap a video to select it 2 Tap D to play the video 3 Press for additional options Multimedia 155 Sharing Pictures e S Beam Transfer uses the NFC near Field Communication Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment but feature found on your device to transmit large files directly to an even better treat is to share them with others another compatible device by direct touch Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series This m
247. nal types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap I gt Sl 2 Tapa group entry gt Add group member 3 From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry 4 Tap Done The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Grou From the Home screen tap gt Eq Tap a group entry Press and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A checkmark displays next to contact entry 5 Tap Done The contacts are removed from the group A oY Contacts 121 Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 From the Home screen tap gt Sl 2 Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group 3 Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone or Vibration pattern fields For more information refer to Creating a New Caller Group on page 121 4 Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap gt 2l 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Select either Select all or tap the desired group 4 Tap Delete Sending a Message to a Group 1 From the Home screen tap 2 gt EA 2 Tap an existing group and press and then tap Send message Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message
248. nana 56 Customizing the Screens 57 Section 3 Memory Card ccssscccsssceses 65 Using the SD Card 000 65 SD card OV CWIOW xn acsnse neu aun nan scien 65 Section 4 Call Functions and Using the Samsung Keyboard 93 2 Contact LISt cecccccccccccccccccecccccccececssccceeesseceee 69 Using Predictive Text 97 Displaying Your Phone Number 69 Using the Google Voice Typing 100 Making a Call 0 ceeeeeeeee 69 Section 6 Contacts cscseseeeeeeees 102 Ending a Call csc ese wise dog wise Goaratin dey ane doar 70 ACCOUNTS aea wher ae yen ose ee paracate ars 102 Making Emergency Calls 71 Contacts List oaaae 103 Dialing Options nunua 72 Finding a Contact na nn naana nean 106 Answering a Call aaan 73 Contact List Options aaaea 109 Managing Reject Calls 74 Contact Menu Options 110 International Calls 00 0c 75 Contact Entry Options 111 Pause Dialing 0 00 c eee eee 75 Joining Contact Information 112 Wait Dialing naaa 76 Sending a Namecard uuaa 114 Redialing the Last Number 76 Copying Contact Information 116 Speed Dialing aan esse ecdeweetoasesae T Synchronizing Contacts 0 117 Using S Voice 0 0 0 0 ccc eee ee eee ee 78 Display Options yesit
249. ncreases less time is required before you hearing could be affected e Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises such as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal e Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 20190 Voice 800 222 2336 Email info audiology org Internet http www audiology org Pages default aspx Health and Safety Information 333 National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 Email nidcdinfo nih gov Internet http www nidcd nih gov National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington DC 20201 Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 Outside the U S 513 533 8328 334 Email cdcinfo cdc gov Internet http www cdc gov niosh topics noise default htm 1 888 232 6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to fo
250. ne e Link to Calendar allows you to link the memo to your Calendar e Lock allows you to lock an email by using a PIN number e Set as allows you to set a memo as a contact icon Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper e Print allows you to print the screen or web page on a samsung printer using Wi Fi When you are finished creating your memo tap Save on the top menu bar S Suggest Provides on screen recommendations for applications that are specifically supported and made for use on your device Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 20 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt S Suggest 2 Read the terms and conditions Place a check mark in the Agree field then tap Agree 4 Select an application from one of the available categories Picks Categories Games Friends and Info 5 Follow the on screen download and installation instructions S Voice Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Q S Voice For more information refer to Using S Voice on page 78 Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications to your dev
251. ne from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 From the Home screen press and hold the Lock key until Device options displays 2 Tap Silent mode from the Device Options screen to activate or deactivate this mode the current mode displays Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup menu 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels e Music video games and other media Ringtone Notifications or System 3 Tap OK to assign the volume levels Changing Your Settings 283 Vibration intensity Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is for different options 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Vibration intensity 2 Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for Incoming call Notification and Haptic feedback 3 Tap OK to assign the vibration levels Setup the Voice Call Ringtone This option allows you to set the ringtone 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Device ringtone 3 Tap a ringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 4 Tap OK t
252. ner Information This option allows you to show user defined information on the Lock screen 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen gt Owner information 2 Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to create a checkmark if you want your owner information displayed 3 Enter text that you would like displayed on your Lock screen 4 Press twice to save the new text and return to the previous screen Encrypt Device When enabled this feature requires a password be used to decrypt the device each time you turn it on Encrypt SD Card When enabled this feature requires a password be used to decrypt the microSD card each time it is connected Changing Your Settings 299 Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your micro SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN Tap Change SIM PIN Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK PSY 300 Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the p
253. ng attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message tap O Attach and select one of the following options e Images allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message e Take picture allows you to temporarily exit the message take a photo with phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save e Video allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list then add it to your message e Record video allows you to temporarily exit the message record a video clip using the phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save e Audio allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green then tapping OK Record audio allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an audio clip using the phone s microphone It is then automatically attached to the message S Memo allows you to add an S Memo that you have created e Calendar allows you to add an event from your calendar e Location allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location e Contacts allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry then add it to your message by tapping Done Adding Additional Text You can copy text such as names phone numbers and events from your Contacts Calendar or a Memo 1 While composing a message press gt Add text 2
254. ng in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device e Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source e Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately e Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing e When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to e Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume i
255. nics Co and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you 5 UPGRADES This EULA applies to updates supplements and add on components if any of the Software that Samsung Electronics Co may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade To use Software identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung Electronics Co as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility 6 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms Warranty Information 347 7 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions
256. nished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception Warranty Information 341 or transmission or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and hols
257. nlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Face 3 Read the on screen notification and tap Set it up 4 Follow the on screen instructions Using Face and Voice Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Face and voice Read the on screen notification and tap Set it up 4 Follow the on screen instructions Changing Your Settings 295 5 Once prompted to speak and unlock command tap and repeat the phrase four times 6 Once complete tap Done Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the User visible pattern field you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock If you forget your pattern you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code Note Make s
258. ntered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resoluti
259. ntext menu 4 Tap Edit title 5 Enter a new name for this playlist and tap OK Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the device from the Play Store Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card For more information refer to Communicating with the SD card on page 66 Removing Music Files 1 From the Home screen tap Music Player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Delete gt OK The music file s is deleted Multimedia 187 Apps gt Music Hub Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music manager It lets you access buy and download millions of music tracks Access top albums top tracks featured albums and new releases as well as search for tracks albums and artist Enjoy music samples before you download them from your device Note You must sign up for an account before accessing some of the Music Hub options 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Music Hub 2 Read the Disclaimer and tap Confirm to continue or Back to exit The Music Hub Home screen displays 3 Tap one of the following options e Featured This is the Music Hub home screen Displays top albums featured aloums top tracks new releases and more Tap an i
260. ntries from the list l 1 From the Home screen tap K gt S 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Tap Select all 4 Tap Delete to continue with the erasure Tap Cancel to stop the current process Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a Call for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed 1 Press GG Power to reactivate the screen 2 Touch and drag the button with the number of missed calls on it anywhere on the screen The Logs tab is then displayed Call Functions and Contacts List 91 Section 5 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your phone This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Your phone also provides several on screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier Text Input Methods There are three text input methods available Google voice typing provides a voice to text interface e Samsung keyboard default an on screen QWERTY keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientatio
261. ntry Press and then tap Separate contact 4 Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin and select OK The contacts are unjoined or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed Contacts 113 Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Mark as default The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact information 4 Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Done 114 Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selected for dialing Sending a Namecard A Namecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business
262. o onpage 226 S Suggest Provides on screen recommendations for applications that are specifically supported and made for use on your device For more information refer to S Suggest on page 228 S Voice Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode For more information referto Using S Voice on page 78 OK l D Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications to your device This includes games news reference social networking navigation and more For more information refer to Samsung Apps on page 229 Search Provides an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Settings Accesses the device s built in Settings menu For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 264 T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Understanding Your Device 49 a 50 T Mobile TV Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your device This application is a subscription service For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 230 Talk Launches a Web based Google Talk application that lets you chat and video conference with family and friends over the Internet for free For more information refer to Google Talk on p
263. o Amazon com via a built in mobile application For more information referto Amazon on page 204 Calculator Found within the Utility application this launches the on screen calculator application The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator For more information refer to Ca culator on page 205 tose Calendar 31 Launches a calendar application that syncs to your Facebook Google or Microsoft Exchange work calendars For more information refer to Calendar on page 259 a Camera Launches the built in 8 0 megapixel camera application from where you can take a picture with either the front or rear facing cameras Note A micro SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video due to built in storage Note The default storage location is your phone It is recommended that you store your pictures and videos on a microSD card If something were to occur to the device your files are still protected In addition to taking photos the built in camera also doubles as acamcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 150 For more information refer to Using the Camcorder on page 164 ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat with more than 2
264. o allows you to choose which contacts to display You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers Note Once a display filter has been selected only those Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is re selected Contacts 117 From the Home screen tap EY Press and then tap Contacts to display Select any of the following to filter according to the selection e All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts e ChatON allows you to display those Contacts currently shared with ChatON e MobileLife Contacts lists those Contacts currently found within the MobileLife account e Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and sync d within the Samsung account e Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account e Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account e SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card e Phone lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone e Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are displayed For example on Google contacts you can filter which Contact categories are shown Friends Family etc Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchronize applications such as Facebook Twitter MySpace a corporate email account or Google using the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account
265. o assign a ringer 284 Setup the Device Vibration This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Device vibration 3 Select a vibration pattern and tap OK Setting a Default Notification Ringtone This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for notifications and alarms 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Default notifications 2 Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK Setting up Sound and Vibration This option allows you to adjust the sound and vibration functions 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap the Sound and vibration field to activate the feature Audible System Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad make a screen selection lock your screen or tap the screen Each time you press a key or make a Selection the selected tone sounds 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Keytones to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status 3 Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status 4 Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status 5 Tap Haptic feedback to activate the a vibration when you press soft keys on certain s
266. o each track that you want to add to your basket Tap Add next to the album to add it to your album or Tap Add next to each track that you want to add to your album Tap New to create a new album AllShare Play This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer Important You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi Fi and be using an active registered Samsung account prior to using this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 264 For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 20 Multimedia 189 Note For more information on defining the various AllShare features definitions on page 203 Important The Samsung account manages the access information username password to several applications such as AllShare Play Chat On and Media Hub 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account There should be no icon in the Notifications area of the screen 2 From
267. obile phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines The maximum SAR values for this model phone as reported to the FCC is e Head 0 43 W kg Body worn 1 26 W kg SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http www fcc gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply wi
268. oco cooky Helvetica S Rosemary or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts e Font size allows you to select which size of font is displayed e Auto adjust screen tone adjusts the phone s LCD brightness level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power e Display battery percentage to activate deactivate the display of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen e Gyroscope calibration uses the built in gyroscope to calibrate motion when the phone is in motion Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Display gt Brightness Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self adjust and tap OK or Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK Gyro Sensor Calibration Calibrate your device by using the built in gyroscope 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Display gt Gyroscope calibration Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate The phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer During the calibration process a green circle appears on screen and the center circle adjusts to the center position Wallpaper The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen Lock screen or both 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wallpaper 2 Select an available option to change its current wallpaper
269. of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back Call Functions and Contacts List 87 Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call was missed Accessing the Logs Tab 1 From the Home screen tap K gt Logs tab 2 Tap an entry to view available options Note The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history 88 Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts A Akep Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device Indicates any received calls that were answered Indicates a missed call Indicates any received calls that were rejected Indicates auto rejected calls Accessing Call lo
270. of various countries You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments 8 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung Electronics Co if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 9 Disclaimer of Warranty ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR 348 WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE
271. ogy on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positioning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s network and therefore Health and Safety Information 329 airtime data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information may be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore e Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and 330 Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instruct
272. olders etc Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt E My files 2 Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file e Home tab A allows you to back up to the root directory e Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory e Press and then tap View by to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail e Press for these additional options Create folder Delete Search View by Sort by Share via Move Copy Rename and Settings 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application Applications and Development 219 Navigation Enabling GPS Location Google Maps Navigation Beta is an internet connected 1 Press gt Balj and then tap Settings gt Location turn by turn GPS navigation system with voice guidance services oS 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be from Sources such a amp Wi Fi and mobile networks to Wrong dangerous MIOHIDILEG OF MYONG Tormos provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap Use GPS sat
273. omatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off e Noise reduction suppresses background noise on your side of the conversation during an active call e Fixed dialing numbers manages fixed dialing numbers See description below e Auto area code allows you to automatically prepend a specific area code to all outbound calls For more information refer to Using Auto Area Code on page 281 Configuring the In Call Equalizer 1 Press and then tap a Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt In call sound EQ settings e In call sound EQ assigns a sound equalizer preset for use during an active call Sometimes you might need the sound to be clearer or optimized e Personalized EQ allows you to configure and tailor the in call settings that are unique to you Tap Start and follow the on screen instructions Using Auto Area Code This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls When enabled the designated prefix is always added before your dialed numbers Ex If you were using 999 as your area code 555 5555 would be dialed as 999 555 5555 1 2 Press and then tap Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings Tap Auto area code enter a new prefix and then tap OK In a single motion drag the slider to the right to turn it on ONS Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of
274. ompartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 Removing Battery 12 Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your device Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your device for the first time you must fully charge the battery A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours Charging Head Incorrect Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery can cause the device to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time Connect the USB cable to the charging head Locate the Charger Accessory jack Insert the USB cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Getting Started 13 5 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s
275. on refer to Export Import on page 120 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap FE Gallery Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process EE Applications gt Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Factory data reset 2 Read the on screen reset information 3 Tap Reset device 4 If necessary enter your password and tap Delete all The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home screen Collect Diagnostics This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use 1 Press gt 3 and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics 2 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 3 Choose to enable or disable the feature by placing a check mark in the Allow Diagnostics field 4 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description scree and does not disable data co
276. on e This is used as the To address for the new outgoing text message that is sent when a user swipes their device over the TecTile Enter a text message into the Message Content field e For example if you wanted your child to send you a text message when they get home the TecTile would be programmed to send you a new text message to your cell number with the message string I m Home Tap Next Place the device over the TecTile to program the action into the TecTile Confirm the TecTile is functioning properly and place it on its new location To program your TecTile to join you to a Wi Fi network 1 From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt oJ TecTile Select Settings amp Apps gt Join a WiFi Network Tap gt Connect to Wi Fi to locate and connect to hd an available Wi Fi or Enter the SSID information name of the Wi Fi Select the Network security and enter your password Tap Next Applications and Development 233 6 Place the device over the TecTile to program the action into the TecTile 7 Confirm the TecTile is functioning properly and place it on its new location Talk You can instant message with Google Talk Google Talk allows you to communicate with other people who are also connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Talk For more information refer to Google Talk on page 145 234 Task Manager
277. on refer to Photo Editor on page 169 Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Note To ensure the Camcorder can record the video use an SDHC memory card Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt LOR Camera to activate the camera mode 2 Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder Mode 3 Using the phone s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject Note Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread pinch the screen to zoom in or out For more information refer to Navigating Through the Screens on page 51 4 Tap the Video key to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording 5 Tap anywhere on the screen to re focus the camera on that object The camcorder auto focuses on the new target area 6 Tap the screen then select w to turn on auto focus This will automatically focus the video based on the object at the middle of the screen 7 To capture an image from the video while recording tap This feature is not available while the anti shake feature is activated 8 Tap the Video key again to stop t
278. on procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Precautions for Transfer and Disposal lf data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System EFS Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Warranty Information 345 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 9012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC All rights reserved No reproduction in whole
279. on type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type Contacts 105 7 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Home Mobile Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Car Company Main MMS Radio Assistant Other Callback or Custom 8 Enter additional fields as desired 9 Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Delete to delete the current entry Note For further details about how to enter characters see Text Input Methods on page 92 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in memory or an external location such as Google Exchange or T Mobile Backup They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity called Contacts Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ 106 From the Home screen tap Contacts Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed or Tap the Find contacts field and begin entering the entry s name Matching entries are then displayed This process filters through all of your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll thro
280. onnecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup 3 Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless version of this same functionality would be the Mobile AP feature Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 256 For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 257 Near Field Communication This feature is used to read and exchange tags When used in conjunction with Android Beam your device can be used to beam application content when NFC capable devices are touched For more information refer to TecTiles on
281. or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place e Search manually search for a destination address place name of business or even a type of business e Layers allows you to switch map views See previous description e Settings provides access to both Power settings Screen dimming and Information Terms privacy amp notices e Exit navigation terminates the application Help provides on screen help 222 Phone This application provides the ability to make or answering calls access the Contacts list which is used to store contact information m From the Home screen tap is Phone For more information refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 69 Play Books Formerly known as Google Books this application allows you to read over 3 million ebooks on the go Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and settle down with a great book on your Android phone 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt W Play Books 2 If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device 3 Tap Q to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks 4 Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your device Play Movies This application allows you
282. or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung Electronics Co for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation 346 Software Samsung Electronics Co is a separate company from the company that provides the limited warranty for this mobile device Samsung Telecommunications America LLC This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD RETURN THE DEVICE TO THE RETAILER FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung Electronics Co grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer o
283. ord to display the password as you enter it in the associated field e Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POPS or IMAP Follow the on screen prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider Tap Next At the Account options screen select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next e Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications e Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when using Wi Fi At the Set up email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify yourself on this account e The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device Tap Done to store the new account Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Opening an Email 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Ea gt Email Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts managed by the application to be listed on a single screen Select an email account and tap an email message Refreshing E
284. ormation displays information about registering your device to play DivX e Software update allows you to connect to the network and protected video tap License settings gt DivX VOD upload any new phone software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software e Model number displays the device s model number when you access this option e Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this e Status displays the battery status the level of the battery device percentage the network connection signal strength mobile e Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on network type service state roaming status mobile network this device state My phone number ERI version IMEI number IMEI SV IP e Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this address Wi Fi MAC address Bluetooth address Serial device number Up time and Device status e Build number displays the software build number Changing Your Settings 315 Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative 316 Section 13 Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this inform
285. ose from Always Only in silent mode or Never Emergency alerts settings e Emergency Alerts allows you to configure emergency alert settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receive Choose from Imminent extreme alerts Imminent severe alert and AMBER alerts Note The Presidential alert can not be disabled e Emergency notification preview allows you to play a sample emergency alert tone Tap Stop to cancel the playback e Alert reminder allows you to configure the reminder interval Choose from Once Every 2 minutes Every 15 minutes or Off Messages 131 Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency Alerts e Alerts issued by th
286. oups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone For more information refer to Messenger on page 148 B Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and portable HotSpot menu where you can use either the USB tethering or portable hotspot functionality For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 218 More Services Provides access to additional Samsung Apps and services Works in conjunction with the Samsung Apps feature For more information refer to More Services on page 218 Music Hub Allows you to purchase and download songs For more information refer to Music Hub on page 188 Music Player Launches the built in Music player that allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists For more information refer to Music Player on page 184 My files Lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Organize and store data images and more in your own personal file folders Files are stored to either the internal storage or memory card in separate user defined folders For more information refer to My files on page 219 Understanding Your Device 47 N 48 Navigation Launches a Web based navigation application Caution Traffic data is not
287. our Dropbox account Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox 1 From the Home screen tap RA Apps gt E Camera 2 After the image is taken tap the Image Viewer box at the bottom right This previews the current image 3 Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of the screen 4 Tap gt Dropbox select a folder location and tap Upload Note If your share folder is located on your computer you will momentarily receive an on screen popup notifying you that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox folder Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message m From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt Email For more information refer to Using Email on page 133 Applications and Development 209 Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you Access news stories personal feeds and other related material Flip through your Facebook newsfeed tweets from your Twitter account photos from friends and much more 1 From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt F Flipboard 2 Tap Get started select some on screen categories and tap Done to create a new profile Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile 3 Follow the on screen instructions Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basi
288. ovides access to the Play Music settings e Help Displays application help information 180 Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your device s built in speakers through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on screen volume control then touch and drag on the scale to set volume Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Tap a song in your library to listen to it or Current Album Options While viewing a list of songs tap Options next to a song and tap Play While viewing a list of aloums artists playlists or genres tap P Options adjacent to the label and tap Play The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you choose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you stop it even when you switch applications Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens m Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar or In a single motion touch and drag
289. own into smaller segments 100 Configure Google Voice Typing 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select Fa Select input method gt Configure input methods 2 Tap Fey adjacent to the Google voice typing field Select a language by tapping Select input languages area Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages Select the desired languages Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Using Google Voice Typing 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select Es Select input method gt Google voice typing The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to speech Speak into the device s microphone and watch your text being entered on screen If the text is incorrect tap DELETE Once you have completed entering your message tap Done Entering Text 101 Section 6 Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want application
290. p Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling third party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store 1 Press gt E and then tap Settings gt Application manager gt All 2 Tap the third party application and from the Application info screen tap Uninstall 226 S Memo The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the keypad your finger or both You can add images voice recordings and text all in one place Creating a New Memo 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt S S Memo The S Memo screen is displayed 2 Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter edit mode or Tap T to start a new memo in text mode with the keypad displayed or tap L to start a new memo in drawing mode using your finger or a compatible on screen writing tool You can change back and forth in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen Toolbar Secondary Toolbar Show Hide Secondary Toolbar Writing area Writing Modes Add Page OWERTY Ul of ie fe Ge ies Se a I Keyboard Tixcvenm ad The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the following table Saves the memo Changes the view mode Allows you to add free format drawing Displays the keypad to yo
291. page 231 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Tap the NFC field A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled Note Enabling NFC also enables Android Beam and S Beam Android Beam This feature when activated via NFC allows you to directly beam application content to another NFC capable device when they are in direct contact These files are typically small such as Calendar and Contact entries 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Verify the NFC feature is active Changing Your Settings 271 3 Tap Android Beam and make sure the feature is turned on 4 lf not already active in a single motion touch and slide the Android Beam slider to the right to turn it on E 5 Complete the transfer process between the two NFC enabled devices by placing them back to back S Beam This feature when activated via NFC allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact These files can be larger such as Videos HD pictures and other large files You can beam images and videos from your gallery music files from your music player and more 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Verify the NFC feature is active 3 Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on 4 lf not already active in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on ON 212 5 Complete the transfe
292. peaker mode Keypad and End Call features the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap End to end the currently active call 2 Note Selecting Location consent may drain battery power For more information refer to Power Saving Mode on page 288 3 Tap to exit this calling mode End call Call Functions and Contacts List 71 Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode i makes redialing an emergency number a 1 tap process Before you can resume normal calling operations you should first exit this mode 1 Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device 2 Press and then tap 4 3 Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap 4 Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features e After completing your emergency call appears in the Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode Note This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode 12 5 At the Emergency Callback screen e Tap to callback 911 with a single tap e Touch and slide to return to the Home screen while still remaining in the Emergency calling mode This allows you to access other applications while staying in this mode e Touch and slide to exit the Emergency calling mode Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad s
293. phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level the actual SAR level of the phone while Operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0 cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this m
294. power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect the charger s connector from the phone Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet DOM eee Oe Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 341 a Note This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for connecting the charger If the charger is incorrectly connected damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone s warranty 14 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain 15 charge a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your device conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight When the battery level becomes too low the device automatically turns off The on screen battery charge is represented by default as a colored battery icon You can also choose to display a percentage value Having a percentage value on screen can pro
295. pplication Cache 290 Uninstalling Third party Applications 290 Market see Play Store 223 Marking contact As a default 114 Media Hub 175 217 Creating a New Account 175 Using 176 Memory card Erasing files from the 67 Merge Calls 85 Merge with Google 109 Message Options 125 Read 127 Reply 128 147 Thread Options 128 Threads 128 Message Search 130 Message threads 128 Messaging Adding Attachments 126 Additional Text 127 Composing Options 126 Creating and sending 124 Creating and Sending Text Messages 124 Deleting a message 129 Google Mail 143 Icons on the Status Bar 123 Insert Smiley 126 Menu Options 125 Options 125 Settings 130 363 Signing into Google Mail 143 Text Templates 132 Types of Messages 123 Viewing new 127 micro SIM Card 10 Changing Exisitng PIN 300 Importing and Exporting 120 Insertion 10 Lock 300 Removal 10 Setting Up Lock 300 microSD Card Insertion 11 Removal 11 Microsoft Exchange 103 133 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 91 Mobile Data Activate Deactivate 268 Set Data Limit 268 Mobile HotSpot 257 Activating 257 Changing Password 258 Connecting 258 364 Mobile Networks 269 Data Roaming 269 Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 269 Mobile Web 238 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 239 Navigating with the Mobile Web 238 Using Bookmarks 241 MobileLife Contacts Backup 103 Mono Audio Setup 312 Motion Function Activation 287 Using to Unlock 295 Motion Settings 287 Mounting the
296. ptions 2 Tap the check box next to each option to enable e Strict mode Makes the screen flash when applications perform long operations on the main thread e Show pointer location Highlights the data that was touched on the screen e Show touches Displays touch interactions on the screen e Show screen updates Areas of the screen flash when they update e Show CPU usage Screen highlights the current CPU usage e Force GPU rendering Uses a 2D acceleration in applications e Window animation scale Configure the scale for animation ranges from off to 10x Changing Your Settings 313 e Transition animation scale Configure the scale for transitioning when using animation ranges from off to 10x Application Options 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as soon as the application is closed 3 Tap Limit background processes to set the number of processes that can run in the background Options are Standard limit No background processes and 1 to 4 processes at most 4 Tap Show all ANRs to display a prompt when applications running in the background are not responding 314 Google Search Settings Use Google Search to search the Web 1 Press gt and then tap OJ Search 2 Press es gt Settings 3 Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter the settings e Google Search opens a screen where you can set your Google
297. r Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap EY 2 Press and then tap Settings Configure any of the following options e Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers e List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted First name or Last name e Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed First name ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve e Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers e Send contact allows you either Send all namecards or Send individual namecards to an external device Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a Call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap gt Groups tab 2 Press and then tap Create 3 Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Jext Input Methods on page 92 4 Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default Ringtones or Go to My files 5 Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern to be associated with this group 6 Tap Save to store the newly created group Note Some externally maintained group types such as Google can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device These exter
298. r a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung Electronics Co reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Samsung Electronics Co or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung Electronics Co and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you if any Samsung Electro
299. r an email from Google in the email box you provided and respond to the email to confirm and activate your new account Signing into Your Google Account 1 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Play Store or Gmail 2 Click Existing Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information 4 Tap Sign in Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information 5 If prompted create a new Gmail username by entering a prefix for your gmail com email address Retrieving your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications If you misplace or forget your Google Account password follow these instructions to retrieve it 1 From your computer use an Internet browser and navigate to http qoogle com accounts 2 Click on the Can t access your account link 3 Follow the on screen password recovery procedure Getting Started 19 Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to the Memory card it is a very good idea to confirm this location before using your device Important Too many users can overlook this storage destination until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap EOR Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap ie Set
300. r cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation 332 Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringi
301. r current account credentials and tap Log in or Tap I m new to Dropbox and follow the on screen instructions to register for a new account 3 Follow the on screen instructions 4 Initially you will need to configure your Camera Upload parameters Choose from Wi Fi only or Wi Fi or data plan e Jap Turn on after making your selection Caution Enabling this feature can incur data charges depending on your plan if the Wi FI or data plan is selected 5 Tap 3 Access Dropbox at the top of the application window to access the files and folders you area currently sharing from your computer 6 Tap an item to open it 10 Touch and hold an on screen item to choose from additional options e Share via applications such as Copy link Bluetooth ChatON Email Flipboard Gmail Google Messaging S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Favorite to tag an image as a favorite e Delete to erase the current file e Rename to rename the current file e Export to transfer the current file to another location via Save to SD card Bluetooth ChatON Email Flipboard Gmail Google Group Cast Messaging Picasa S Memo Wi Fi Direct or Gallery Tap Ct Up a Directory Level at the top of the application window to navigate up a single level with every tap Tap Tag as Favorite at the top of the application window to assign favorite files Tap Q Search at the top of the application window to search for files located in y
302. r for today checkbox if you will be using Kies air with the same PC later 10 11 12 13 14 From your PC a security warning may be displayed asking if you want to run this application Click Run to continue On your PC the Kies air screen is displayed On your phone the icon appears at the top of your screen Follow the on screen instructions to view and share information between your phone and PC Click a link from the left navigation pane to access one of several device file categories such as e Device Name provides an overview of all the main categories e Photos Videos Music e Ringtones e Bookmarks e Messages Call Log Contacts o File Explorer e Language settings To exit the Kies air application tap Stop on your device then close out the Web browser on your computer Wi Fi About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point WAP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi network the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Activating Wi Fi By default your device s Wi Fi feature is turned off deactivated Activating Wi Fi allows your device to discover and connec
303. r is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar 1 From the Home screen tap EH Apps gt 37 Calendar Tap Show More to display these tabs e Year displays the Year view e Month displays the Month view e Week displays the Week view e Day displays the Day view e Agenda displays the Agenda view e Task allows you to search for tasks Tap Create event to create a new Calendar event or Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box then press and select one of the following options e Go to displays a specific date e Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event e Search allows you to search within your current events e Sync synchronizes your current calendar events with your available accounts such as Gmail Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync tc e Settings displays a list of configurable settings Time Management 259 Creating a Calendar Event 1 From the Home screen tap FEE Apps gt feb ill Calendar 2 Within the Year Month Week and Day tabs tap Create event Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to
304. r process between the two NFC enabled devices by placing them back to back This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures between users with compatible S Beam devices For more information refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 158 Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi direct communication This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or WAP Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi network connection To give your Wi Fi Direct connection a unique name It can be difficult to pair to external devices if all you have is a generic name ex Android 12345 It is recommended you provide your connection with a unique name 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Direct 2 Press then tap Device name 3 Edit the current name and tap OK to save the new identification To activate your connection 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi Direct slider to the right to turn it on ONE The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Read the on screen information and tap OK 4 Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device or Tap
305. r ringtone or Alarm tone e Scan for nearby devices allows you to look for DLNA compliant devices used to control streaming media e Settings allows you to change your music player settings e End closes the application Music Player Settings The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays 1 From the Home screen tap Music Player 2 Press gt Settings 3 Select one of the following settings Apps gt Multimedia 185 e SoundAlive set a type of equalization such as Normal Pop Rock Jazz Dance Classic etc e Play speed set the play speed anywhere between 0 5X and 2 0X using the slider e Music menu this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display Choices are Aloums Artists Genres Music square Folders Composers Years Most played Recently played or Recently added Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu e Lyrics when activated the lyrics of the song are displayed if available e Music auto off when activated music will automatically turn off after a set interval Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Player and downloading those files to an SD c
306. re Cast Slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status Pairing AllShare Cast Hub To pair your device and Hub for the 1st time 1 Locate the AllShare Hub dongle name displayed at the bottom of the TV showing the tutorial Ex Name Dongle XXXXXX 2 Access your device s AllShare Cast screen and locate the same hub dongle name in the list e Tap Scan if your AllShare Cast Hub dongle does not appear in the list 3 Verify your AllShare Cast Hub is on blinking red LED and the on screen tutorial is displaying on the connected TV Note The AllShare Cast Hub communicates with your paired device via a Wi Fi Direct connection 196 4 Fora first time connection e Press the RESET button located at the rear of the hub once and only for a second until the LED turns solid BLUE e Quickly tap the hub name entry on your device s AllShare Cast screen 5 Verify AllShare Cast Hub Communicating appears at the top of the device s screen 6 Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and device show the same image screen and Q Wi Fi Direct Communicating now displays on the device Important The AllShare Cast Hub is a 1 to 1 connection If a previous device was paired to the Hub and is still connected to the AllShare Cast Hub you can not pair a new device until the first connection is stopped To disconnect your device from the hub 1 Access your device s AllS
307. real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries For more information refer to Navigation on page 220 Phone Provides the ability to make or answering calls access the Contacts list which is used to store contact information For more information refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 69 Play Books Provides access to read over 3 million ebooks on the go For more information refer to Play Books on page 222 Play Movies Rent movies on Google Play and watch instantly using the Google Play Movies app For more information refer to Play Movies on page 178 Play Music Google Music Launches the built in Google Music Player that allows you to play music files that you have both downloaded from Google Music and stored on your microSD card For more information refer to Play Music on page 178 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market it provides access to downloadable applications games music and movies The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone For more information refer to Play Store on page 220 S Memo This application allows you to create memos using the keypad your finger or both You can add images voice recordings and text all in one place For more information referto S Mem
308. redentials to display only trusted CA certificates A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials 3 Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 4 Tap Clear credentials to clear the device SD card or phone memory of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password Changing Your Settings 301 Language and Input Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select a language and region from the list 302 Select Input Method 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default 2 Select an input method or Tap Configure input methods to alter modify the available input methods Samsung Keyboard Settings 1 Press gt E and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fed adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods drag across the icons and select Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen 2 Set any of the following options e Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad de
309. res Example From the Home screen press EJ Menu gt Settings gt Bluetooth Battery Cover The battery micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the G key until the power off image displays then tap Power off Caution Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during installation or removal Doing so may damage the cover To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 2 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly pop the cover off the device similar to a soda can Release Latch To replace the battery cover Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click SIM Card Overview Important Before removing or replacing the micro SIM card make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the Gs key until the power off image displays then tap Power off The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The micro SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Some
310. rmat created by DivX LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu tap Apps gt Settings gt About device gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register Go to vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise intermittent sounds like a siren or nearby conversation and echoes allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere How Does It Work Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system the technology e Captures evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone and the person you re speaking with e Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise so the person you re calling hears only your voice without disturbing background noise Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience so you can hear clearly and don t need to speak louder
311. rovides you with the additional options such as Slideshow allows you to create a slideshow of the currently selected files Rename allows you to rename one or more video files Details displays video file information Photo Editor The Photo editor is not load loaded on your device and must be downloaded via the Samsung Apps The application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture Installing the application from Samsung Apps 1 From the Home screen tap BEY Apps gt PE Gallery E Select a folder location and tap a file to open it With the image displayed press and then tap Edit Tap Download and follow the on screen instructions to begin the download process If prompted accept the Samsung Apps agreement Tap the Get to continue Log into Samsung Account by either tapping Create new account or Sign in using your existing Samsung account information Follow the on screen log in screens 8 If prompted tap Get again to initiate the download process Using the Photo Editor 1 From the Home screen tap HA 17 Photo editor Tap Select image to edit a picture in your Gallery Apps gt N Tap Take picture to take a picture with the camera g Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor Use the follo
312. rs to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing device and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufac
313. s Note If you do not see the Voice typing input method button The Samsung Keyboard Settings then select it from the available options keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keyboard 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default gt Samsung keyboard or Enabling T9 Trace When T9 Trace is enabled the on screen keyboard can be used to enter text by both tapping or swiping across the on screen keys 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt feJ adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select ate Select input method gt Samsung keyboard 2 Tap the checkmark box adjacent to the T9 Trace field to activate the feature A green check mark indicates the feature is active Entering Text 93 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung Entering Text using Different Input Options keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard is to use the on screen keys you have other Shift key Text input field options lt New message Note If you do not see the Voice typing input method button _
314. s To configure browser settings 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt amp Internet 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Choose an option from the following categories General e Set home page Sets the current home page for the Web browser e Form auto fill Allows you to fill in Web forms with a single tap e Auto fill text Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto fill feature Privacy and security e Clear cache Deletes all currently cached data Tap OK to complete the process e Clear history Clears the browser navigation history Tap OK to complete the process e Show security warnings Notifies you if there is a security issue with the current website Remove the check mark to disable this function e Accept cookies Allows sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device e Clear all cookie data Deletes all current browser cookie files e Remember form data Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms Remove the check mark to disable this function e Clear form data Deletes any stored data from previously filled out forms Tap OK to complete the process e Enable location Allows websites to request access to your location Connections 243 e Clear location access Clears location access for all websites Tap OK to complete the process e Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites Remove the check mark to disable thi
315. s to synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 Sign in to your Google account 2 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync or From the Home screen tap E Apps gt Settings gt Accounts and sync 3 If not already active in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on JON The slider color indicates the activation status 102 synchronize all accounts by tapping Sync all _ or Tap Q next to the account you want to synchronize Tap Add account to create a new account Tap an account type to add Follow the on screen instructions The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone SIM Google or Corporate Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phon
316. s Vibrate 278 Call Rejection 74 277 Call Settings 277 Additional Settings 280 Equalizer 280 General 277 Call Status Tones 278 Call Vibrations 278 Call Volume Adjusting 83 Extra Volume 83 278 Call Waiting 87 280 Caller ID 280 Calling Using Wi Fi 79 Calls Auto Reject 277 Making a 69 Multi party 85 Muting 84 Camcorder 164 Accessing the Video Folder 168 Options 166 Shooting Video 165 Camera 149 Camera Options 151 Default Storage Location 154 Enabling Share Shot 157 Lock Screen Shortcut 298 Taking Pictures 150 Voice Control 306 357 Camercorder Taking Pictures During Video 167 Care and Maintenance 331 Charging battery 13 ChatON 145 Adding a Buddy 146 Adding New Buddy 146 Buddy photo share 161 Chatting On 147 Deleting Bubble 147 Register Service 146 Children and Cell Phones 321 Clearing Application cache and data 226 Clock 298 Closing Apps 234 CMAS 131 132 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 324 Configuration Initial 16 Connections Accessing the Internet 238 358 Contact Copying to microSD Card 116 Copying to SIM Card 116 Creating a New 103 Joining 112 New From Keypad 105 Photo 163 Contact Entry Options 111 Contact List Options 109 Contact Menus Options 110 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 108 Adding a Pause or Wait 108 Adding Your Facebook Friends 119 Additional Options 120 Deleting 109 Display Options 117 118 120 Displaying Contacts by Name 120 Export List to microSD 251
317. s displays the settings for the voicemail e Vibrate configures the vibrate settings Choose from Always Only in silent mode or Never e TTY mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 279 e Hearing aids allows you to enable disable hearing aid compatibility For more information refer to HAC Mode on page 280 e Accounts allows you to add SIP accounts and receive incoming calls from those type of accounts e Use Internet calling allows you to configure the incoming call and SIP account information Configuring Call Forwarding 1 2 Press and then tap N Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Call forwarding gt Voice call Tap an available option e Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a secondary number that you specify e Forward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy e Forward when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number e Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turned off TTY Mode A TTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your phone is compatible with se
318. s connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified device using the AllShare Play application Displays when your device is currently sharing streaming media to paired device using the AllShare Play application Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active connected to your device and communicating For more information refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 194 Displays when updates are available for download Displays when a Play Store download has completed PS T s 3 Hl E Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Directis active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when Wi Fi Direct is communicating with another compatible device Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active and communicating For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 256 Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 257 Displays when a share shot has been established with other users via a Wi Fi Direct connection Mi og oga Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against availa
319. s function e Clear passwords Deletes any previously stored usernames or passwords Tap OK to complete the process e Enable notifications Enables notifications for all websites select either Always on On demand user driven or Off e Clear notifications Clears Web notification access for all websites Tap OK to complete the process Accessibility e Force zoom Allows you to override a website s zoom setting and forces a Zoom view e Text size Allows you to manually adjust the size of the on screen text size Scale text up and down Zoom amount on double tap and minimum font size via the use of an on screen slider 244 o Inverted rendering Allows you to adjust the way a Web page is displayed to make it easier to view or read Enabling this feature causes a page to rendered in reverse Black becomes white and vice versa On screen white text is displayed as white text on a black background e Contrast Allows you to adjust the on screen contrast Note The Contrast feature is disabled until the Inverted rendering function is active Advanced e Select search engine Allows you to choose a default search engine for your phone Choose from Google Yahoo or Bing e Open in background New pages are launched in a separate page and displayed behind the current one Remove the check mark to disable this function e Enable JavaScript Enables javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages ma
320. s of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material Health and Safety Information 317 The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from
321. s such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc Feedback allows you to provide application feedback Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy or Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu Help provides help information Media Hub m From the Home screen tap EA Apps gt Media Hub For more information refer to Media Hub on page 175 Messaging This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Messaging For more information refer to Messages on page 123 Applications and Development 217 Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 18 2 From the Home screen tap EHS Apps gt Messenger From the Google application select Messenger For more information refer to Messenger on page 148 Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and portable HotSpot menu
322. s tab 2 Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget 3 Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the screen 4 While still holding the Widget scroll left or right across the available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your Current screen To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the Current screen 2 Drag the widget over the Remove tab M and 62 release it e As you place the Widget into the Trash both items turn red e This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the current screen To place a widget onto a different screen 1 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To change the current Home screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen or Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Home screen window tap Home screen 4 Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to
323. s via Wi Fi 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Tap Kies via Wi Fi gt OK 3 Select a network connection and follow the on screen connection process Refer to the Kies Air process information for more information For more information refer to Kies Air on page 252 Nearby devices This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi Fi 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Nearby devices 2 Verify Wi Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with the device you wish to detect and share content with 3 Ina single motion drag the slider to the right to turn it on ON This action activates the device s ability to share files 4 Verify Nearby devices appears at the top of the screen 10 11 12 At the Nearby devices prompt tap OK Tap Shared contents then check the media you would like to share Tap OK Tap Device name then use the on screen keyboard to change the name shown to others Tap Save Tap Access control then what devices are allowed access Choose from Allow all or Only allowed devices The allowed devices are configured in the following Allowed devices list Tap Allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to allow Tap Not allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to not allow Tap Download to then select the destination of any downloade
324. s wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt E Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap scroll down to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Settings and Note It is recommended that you insert an external microSD card and then set the option to Memory card 4 Press to return to the Home screen Multimedia 149 Using the Camera Taking Photos Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then pressing the camera key Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions shadows may appear on the photo 1 From the Home screen tap R T Camera 2 Using the device s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject Note Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread pinch the screen to zoom in or out For more information refer to Navigating Through the Screens on page 51 3 If desired before taking the photo use the left area of the screen to access various camera options and settings 4 You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest 150 5 Press a Camera until the shutter sounds The pic
325. s you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current location may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To make an emergency call 1 If the mobile device is not on switch it on
326. saying Snooze Changing Your Settings 305 7 Tap Camera to activate a voice control that allows you to verbally take a new picture e Take a new photo by clearly saying either Capture Shoot Smile or Cheese 8 Tap Music to activate a voice control that allows you to verbally control music playback within the Music Player app page 218 Commands include Next Previous Play Pause Volume up and Volume down Note Voice control for music is only available when using the Music player application THis control is not available on Play Music Speech Settings This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice input 1 Press gt 3 and then tap Settings gt Language and input 2 Tap Voice recognizer and select either Google or Samsung powered by Vlingo as your Voice recognition engine 3 Tap Voice search to configure 306 Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Voice search 2 Configure the available options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Language selects an input language and associated dialect recognition if available e SafeSearch sets the explicit image filter settings These settings apply to only Google voice search results Choose from Off Moderate or Strict e Block offensive words allows you to block r
327. se a hands free device e Secure your phone within easy reach e Place calls when you are not moving e Plan calls when your car will be stationary Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations e Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalties or other damages Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to htto www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteri
328. select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper e Tap Wallpapers scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wallpaper 2 Access an available option Choose from Home screen Lock screen or Home and Lock screen Note The Home and lock screens is an additional option that allows you to change both screens at the same time 3 Select a wallpaper type Gallery Live wallpaper or Wallpapers 4 Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper Understanding Your Device 63 To change the current Lock screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen touch and hold an empty area of the screen and tap Lock screen or Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wallpaper gt Lock screen 2 Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Wallpaper scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper 64 Section 3 Memory Card Your device lets you use a microSD SD or microSDHC card also referred to as a memory card to expand available memory space This secure digital card enables
329. sputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty 344 For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be e
330. sser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL License BSD License and other open source licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING T999_UM_MR2_English_UVLH2_PS_110612_F7 THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICA
331. ssword For more information refer to Security and Lock Screen on page 294 274 Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP L2TP IPSec PSK L2TP IPSec RSA IPSec Xauth PSK IPSec Xauth RSA IPSec Hybrid RSA Important Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 If prompted read the screen lock information and follow the on screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password 3 Tap Add VPN network In the form that appears fill in the information provided by your network administrator 5 Tap Save Note Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types Connecting to a VPN 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to 3 Enter any requested credentials into the pop up that opens 4 Tap Connect Edit a VPN 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit In the pop up that opens select Edit network Make the desired VPN setting changes 5 Tap Save Delete a VPN 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete 3 Tap Delete network within the pop up that opens up A 9 N Wi Fi Calling You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an active Wi Fi connection Wi Fi
332. synchronized with your Gmail account Signing into Google Mail N 1 From the Home screen tap HE gt M Gmail Note You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Play Store 2 Tap New if you do not have a Google account or Tap Existing if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email Opening Gmail 1 From the Home screen tap E gt m Gmail 2 Tap an existing email message Refreshing Gmail Mail From within the Gmail message list tap y Refresh at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen send and receive new emails and synchronize your email with the Gmail account Other Gmail Options 1 From the main Gmail screen tap G Labels at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages 2 From the main Gmail screen tap Q Search at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages Composing a Gmail Message 1 From the Home screen tap E gt Di Gmail 2 From the Gmail Inbox tap qj Compose at the bottom of the screen to create a new message 3 Enter the recipients Email address in the To field Tip Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma Messages 143 7 Press and select Add Cc Bcc to add a carbon or blind copy Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your message Once complete tap gt Send V
333. t to open the complete email account list page screen e Select an available email account 3 Toggle any of the available fields to force the device to 3 Tap K Refresh manually resync the parameter Composing Exchange Email or For more information refer to Composing Email on From the current Email inbox listing press and page 135 then tap Settings gt lt Exchange email account gt and specify the email settings you wish to synchronize e Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account 140 e Signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on __ON Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap OK to Save the new signature e Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails e Forward with files Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offl
334. t to compatible in range WAPs Wireless Access Points 1 Press gt 3 and then tap Settings Connections 253 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on MON The slider color indicates the activation status The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 2 Note When you select an open network you are automatically 3 4 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section Tap the network you wish to connect to connected Enter a wireless password if necessary Tap Connect 204 Wi Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status u Ca e oA a i 0 4 t EI Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and communicating Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating Manually Add a New Network Connection 1 From the W
335. t you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer Also ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2 0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer Connecting as a Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory If you insert a memory card in the device you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader Note The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk separate from the internal memory 1 Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to the computer After a few seconds a pop up window displays on the PC when connected 2 Open the folder to view files 3 Copy files from the PC to the memory card Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update Before using Kies air to upgrade your device it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 120 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap Ea Apps gt AK Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating a Kies air upda
336. tacts List you can set up to 99 speed dial entries 2 100 and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key Note Speed dial location 1 must be reserved for Voicemail use Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important Speed dial location 1 is reserved for Voicemail No other number can be assigned to this slot 1 From the Home screen tap 4 2 Press fe and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the numbers 2 through 100 3 Tap an unassigned number slot The Select contact screen displays 4 Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting Important The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot 3 Press and then tap Change order 4 Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial location Note Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to switch positions 5 Press to exit the Change order screen and return to the previous screen Call Functions and Contacts List 77 Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Press and then tap Speed dial setting 3 Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location
337. tc automatically update in your contacts list 112 1 From the Home screen tap 2i 2 Tap a contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information 3 Press and then tap Join contact 4 Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen Note The information is still maintained in both entries but displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts Unjoining a Contact Important It is the first contact image that is displayed for p 9 pay 1 From the Home screen tap 2 both and the first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with 2 Tap a contact name the account name from which you Julie second entry Julie seems to disappear and want to unjoin an entry This reveals the details for only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry showing the entry Amy image to view both ee eee eee eee Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name 5 Tap the main linked contact to view the contact or account information information you linked The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to 3 Tap the Connections area indicate what type of account information is contained l in the e
338. te 124 Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field or w and selecting recipients Tap the Enter message field and use the on screen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Inout Methods on page 92 Review your message and tap EZA Send If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you send it it will be automatically saved as a draft Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate an entry from the Contacts list 3 Ina single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the left This action addresses a new text message to the selected recipient eens Quick Lontact Tips Calling Quick Texting Message Options Options before composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap Messaging Before composing a message press from the main Messaging screen to display additional messaging options e Search allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap cy For more information refer to Message Search on page 130 e Text templates displays your available text message reply templates For more information refer to Text Templates on p
339. te Connections 251 Enabling USB Debugging USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the Development feature 1 Press gt 5 and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active before connecting your USB cable 3 Using an optional PC data cable connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC Kies Air Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC Tip Before beginning it is recommended that you update the Java application running on your machine 1 Sign onto the same Wi Fi network from your phone and from your PC 252 2 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt Kies air From the Kies air homescreen tap Start If prompted select a network Choose from either Wi Fi or Portable Wi Fi hotspot 5 Write down the on screen URL address Important Both your phone and your computer must be connected to the same Wireless Access Point WAP 6 From your computer enter the URL in your Web browser 7 If prompted an Access Request prompt is displayed on your device Tap Allow to permit connection between the computer and device 8 On your computer you may be prompted to run a Java plugin for a TransferManagerApplet Click Run 9 Tap the Remembe
340. tem to display more information and prices e Genres Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre such as pop rock jazz comedy and blues 188 e Playlists Displays downloaded playlists and your library of songs and albums Tap New to create a new playlist e My page Displays the following options Basket Displays songs that you have selected to buy Tap Buy to start the purchase process Tap Menu gt Delete all to clear your basket or tap Remove to delete songs from your basket Purchase List Displays a list of your purchases Payment information Allows you to set up your payment method Tap Add card to enter your payment information Help Display help information for Music Hub Note You have to be signed in to use some options To sign in tap Sign in and use the keyboard to enter your Email address and Music Hub Password Tap Create account to set up a new account 4 Tap ey Search and use the keyboard to enter a key word or phrase to search for tracks albums or artists Tap on the keyboard to search Music Hub Select an item to play a sample add an item to your basket or add an item to your album Making a Purchase You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks You can also build your own album from various tracks 1 From the Home screen tap BEY Apps gt Music Hub Select an album or a track Tap ey Cart next to an album to add the album to your basket or next t
341. ters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the 342 remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the Sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits on SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SA
342. th the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception Health and Safety Information 323 which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s cover
343. the Home screen tap Apps gt Dy Allshare Play 3 If prompted read the on screen message about network charges and tap OK to continue and return to the main AllShare Play screen Note If the main screen still shows a Sign in box close the application and restart it 4 Tap Start and follow the on screen prompts 190 The application contains two separate streaming media options e Registered Storage allows you to receive and playback media stored externally Server laptop etc directly on your device by allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming content e Registered Devices allows you to stream share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same Wireless Access Point Configuring AllShare Settings The AllShare Play application must first be configured prior to its initial use You must setup parameters such as connected Wi Fi Items to share source server address and external device acceptance rights 1 From the Home screen tap Dy Allshare Play 2 Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired e Registered Storage allows you to add a Web storage location Without a storage service location added you will not be able to use AllShare Play Apps gt e Registered Devices defaults to your phone This indicates the source of the streaming images and videos Use the main screen to add more external devices e
344. the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas Such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center 336 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may detect a buzzing humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than othe
345. then appears within the Manage accounts area of the screen e Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then automatically updated to your device 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Account To configure the Google management settings and sync 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt 2 Tap Sync all Accounts and sync Synchronizing a Google Account 2 Tap FY within the Google account field to reveal the To add a new Google account 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Tap Add account gt Google gt Existing Note If you do not already have a Google account tap Create 5 and follow the on screen prompts to create your new account 292 account s synchronization settings screen Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Tap Sync now to synchronize those enabled parameters Press to return to the previous screen For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 117 Synchronizing Your Corporate Account By default there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by the device These must be manually added Note Once a corporate email account is created it is automatically added as a managed account Use the following procedure to configure your phone to synchronize with a corporate email account 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Settings Accounts and sync or Press gt and t
346. ther provisions shall continue in full force and effect 101212 Warranty Information 353 index Numerics 2 Sec Pause Adding 73 4G 257 A Accessibility Install Web Scripts 312 Accessing Recently used applications 57 Voice mail 22 Accessory 310 Audio Applications 310 Audio Output 310 Dock Sound 310 Screen Display 310 Accounts and Sync Adding Contacts 118 Add 2 Sec Pause 75 108 Add to Favorites 122 Adjusting Call volume 83 354 Airplane Mode 37 Airplane Mode 269 Alarm Setting 261 Turning Off 262 Voice Control 305 Alerts Presidential 131 Alerts on Call 278 Allow Diagnostics 17 309 Allowing Mock Locations 313 AllShare Definitions 203 AllShare Cast Activation 273 On 196 198 274 AllShare Cast Hub 34 1st Time Pairing 196 Activation on Device 196 Connecting 195 Disconnecting Your Device 196 Dongle 196 Pairing 196 Pairing Your Devices 196 Re pairing a Device 197 Set Up Hardware 195 Streaming Videos 198 Troubleshooting 197 AllShare Play Configuring Settings 190 Group Cast 161 194 Sharing Files 192 Sharing Media 193 Uploading Images to Web 192 Uploading Video to Web 193 Web Storage Setup 191 AllShareCast Hub 204 AMBER Alerts Disable 132 AMBER alerts 131 Amergency alerts Message Settings 131 Android Beam 271 On 272 Answering a call 73 Answering Key 278 Any Key Answering 311 Application cache and data Clearing 226 Application Menus Navigating through 56 Applications 41 AllShar
347. tially cause damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a metallic object coin key jewelry clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non Samsung approved batteries and or chargers Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger e Misuse
348. tings and scroll down to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press to return to the Home screen 20 Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Maps Latitude Play Store etc An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as Chat On and AllShare Play Note The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application 1 Tap FEY and tap any of the above mentioned applications such as AllShare Play or In a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to reveal the Notifications panel and tap Samsung account 2 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in If this is your first time tap Create new account 3 Tap Terms and conditions and Privacy policy to read the legal disclaimers and related information 4 If you agree to the terms place a green check mark in the I accept all the terms above field and tap Agree Note Confirm the Samsung account icon no longer appears in the Notifications area at the top of the screen 7 Confirm the Samsung account i
349. tive Samsung account lf several of your contacts are from other external sources this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Samsung account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit e Merge with Google allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with your active Google Gmail account If several of your contacts are from other sources such as Corporate email Internet email Facebook etc this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Gmail account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit Contacts 109 110 e Accounts allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on samsung account ChatON Google LDAP Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or MobileLife Contacts This option also allows you to manually synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts e Speed dial setting allows you to set up speed dialing e Send email allows you to send an email using your Google account e Send message allows you to send a text or picture message e Contacts to display allows you to choose to only display contacts that are part of a customized list MobileLife Contacts Gmail display contacts stored to your SIM card Microsoft Exchange email display contacts stored on your device and or display All contacts e Settings allows you to configure where you save new contacts to or view your service numbers or send contact information Options include Only contacts with phones List by
350. to overcome surrounding noise The noise suppression technology is built in and already enabled in your new mobile phone So it s ready to provide unsurpassed voice clarity with every call Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started cccsse Understanding this User Manual Battery Cover oe unuunu PEN r T E Extending Your Battery Life Initial Device Configuration Switching the Device On or Off Restarting the Device 00 Locking and Unlocking the Device Creating a New Google Account Signing into Your Google Account Retrieving your Google Account Password Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location 00 Creating a Samsung Account VOICE Mall sides t bare cea eae ae outed wes Visual Voicemail soca ccc cd eet taeda Task Manager gc era dan eee args enn aes Section 2 Understanding Your Device 25 Features of Your Device 25 PPOMU VIEW gaara te ate due ws aos 4 eae ata ate 21 BACK VION arren e EEE 29 Side VICWS oona 29 Device Display scc sce pws ee ee ea a 30 Status Bar aviv ovo i seen eyes owaanaeds 31 FUNCION KOS 626 0 da an oreo ieee aoe se 2 38 Home Screen 0 cc eee ees 38 Applications onana 2 000 2 2 4 d 2 9 0 a ee 41 Screen Navigation 0 eee ee 51 Using Gestures n n uounuea naaca 54 Menu Navigation nana
351. to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Important During the creation of a text message adding an image sound file or video clip automatically changes it from a text message SMS to a multimedia message MMS Message Icons on the Status Bar Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 31 Note The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping fA Apps gt amp Messaging Messages 123 Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the Home screen tap Messaging gt A Compose 2 Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or Tap Ey to select from one of the following e Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address e Groups to select a recipient from the Group list e Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list e Logs to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages 3 If adding a recipient from either Logs Contacts or Group tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Done The contact displays in the recipient field Note Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their name number in the recipient area and selecting Dele
352. to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Play Movies A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list For more information refer to Play Movies on page 178 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m From the Home screen tap HH Apps gt Gp Play Music For more information refer to Play Music on page 178 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account Accessing the Play Store 1 From the Home screen tap Play Store 2 If not already logged in with your Google account tap Next Apps gt Applications and Development 223 3 Tap Existing and enter your Google account information 4 Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 224 Downlo
353. to smooth facial features e Panorama takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and then adding additional images to itself The guide box lets you view the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall within e Cartoon gives your photo a cartoon look e Share shot uses Wi Fi Direct to share your pictures quickly with your friends For more information refer to Enabling Share Shot on page 157 e Buddy photo share uses face recognition from pictures in your contacts to send your friends or family pictures of themselves Multimedia 151 sly 152 Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Black and white Sepia Washed out Cold vintage Warm vintage Posterize Solarize Blue point Green point or Red yellow point Share shot Share with lists the current participants sharing images with you via an active Share shot session Share shot Shooting mode lists the current shooting modes available from with the Share Shot mode tt Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Self portrait allows you to setthe frontcameraso you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode For more information see Shooting mode description Scene
354. to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm Time Management 261 9 Move the Smart alarm slider to to activate this feature which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min or 30 min and nature tone Fairy fountain Birdsong by the lake Sparkling mist The secret forest Serenity or Gentle spring rain e Duration category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone 10 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm 11 Tap Save to store the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm Jo stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide to any direction Setting the Snooze Feature To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide to any direction Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings 262 World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt X Clock 2 Tap the World clock tab 3 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World Clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settings Select a DST setting Au
355. tomatic Off 1 hour or 2 hours If Daylight Savings Time is selected the sun symbol on the World Clock listing will appear orange Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From the Home screen tap KG Clock gt Stopwatch tab Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter Tap Stop to stop the counter Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter Setting a Timer 1 From the Home screen tap amp Clock gt Timer tab 2 Tap the Hours Minutes or Seconds field and use the on screen keypad to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over Apps gt go eN Apps gt 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked m From the Home screen tap N Clock gt Desk clock tab au Apps gt Time Management 263 Section 12 Changing Your Settings This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your device Accessing Settings m From the Home screen tap EY Apps
356. tooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one is required and tap OK Changing Your Settings 267 Data Usage Monitor and mange your device s data usage capabilities Features include activation deactivation or network data usage set mobile data usage for a set period of time and view application data usage m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Data usage To activate deactivate Mobile data usage 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Data usage 2 Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature A green checkmark indicates the feature is active 3 Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the feature To set a mobile data limit 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Data usage 2 Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field 3 Read the on screen disclaimer info and tap OK 268 Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and Maximum data limits Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time frames Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the current cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle Press and then select from the available on screen
357. trator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant Samsung Electronics Co its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and Samsung Electronics Co shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim 352 case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung Electronics Co s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung Electronics Co no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of this device To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the s
358. ttings gt Storage 2 Tap Unmount SD card gt OK 3 After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card For more information refer to Removing the microSD Memory Card on page 11 SD card Memory Status To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under both the Total space and SD card headings Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device 1 Ensure the SD card is mounted For more information refer to Unmounting the SD card on page 67 2 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Storage gt Mount SD card 3 Tap Format SD card gt Format SD card gt Delete all to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Memory Card 67 Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Back up and reset 2 Tap Factory data reset This action erases all data from your device except current system software and bundled applications or SD card files such as music or photos Note This feature provides an option to format the internal USB storage not the microSD card 3 Tap Reset device gt Delete all 68 Section 4 Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes featur
359. ture is automatically stored within your designated storage location page 149 If no microSD is installed all pictures are stored on the Phone For more information refer to Camera Options on page 151 Note Touch and hold to take a burst shot These are saved using a Fine image quality Self portrait Focus area Camera Camcorder Storage Charge mode Flash Image viewer Camera Camcorder Settings Shooting Effects mode button Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen The following shortcuts are available for the camera gt OA oe Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode to one of the following e Single shot takes a single photo and view it before returning to the shooting mode e Burst shot allows several photographs to be captured in quick succession by touching and holding the Camera button e HDR takes pictures in HDR High Dynamic Range mode to increase image detail e Face detection adjusts the camera focus based on face detection technology Smile shot the camera focuses on the face of your subject Once the camera detects the person s smile it takes the picture e Beauty adjusts the contrast
360. turer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating the sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly Health and Safety Information 337 The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses However there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations using your hearing aid or cochlear implant to determine if you hear any interfering
361. ty 325 Bigger Font Setting 312 Bing Set Search Engine 244 Blacklist Adding 111 Bluetooth 266 About 245 Change Name 246 Configure Device Settings 248 Deleting a Paired Device 249 Device Name 267 Disconnecting a Paired Device 249 Media Audio 248 Microhone Function 248 Off 246 266 On 246 266 Outgoing Headset Condition 278 Paring Devices 247 Review Downloaded Files 247 Scan for Devices 247 Scanning for other Devices 267 Sending Contact Information 249 Sending Contacts Via 249 Sending Namecard 115 Set Visibility 247 Settings 246 Status indicators 246 Switching to Headset during call 84 Turning on and off 245 266 Visibility 267 Visible Time Out 247 Browser Adding bookmarks 242 Deleting bookmarks 242 Easier to Read Pages 244 Emptying cookies 242 Entering a URL 239 Inverted Display 244 Navigation 238 Options 238 Quick Controls 245 Search Engine 244 Settings 243 Bubble Options 128 C Calculator Scientific Functions 205 Calendar 205 259 Creating an event 260 Settings 260 sync 259 Calibration 286 Call Settings 74 Voice Control 305 Call Alert 278 Call Vibrations 278 Call Answering Ending 278 Call Barring 280 Call Forwarding 278 Configuring 279 Call Functions 69 Answering 73 Background Calling 70 Ending 70 Ending a Call 70 Ending via Status Bar 71 Equalizer 278 Making a Multi Party Call 85 Pause Dialing 75 Redialing the last number 76 Wait dialing 76 Call Functon
362. type with your Contacts list 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync gt Add account 2 Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list Selections are Samsung account ChatON Dropbox Email Facebook for synching Google LDAP Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or MobileLife Contacts 3 Tap an account type to add 4 Follow the prompts The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list 5 After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact information For more information refer to Joining Contact Information on page 112 To add Facebook content to your Contacts list You can now add your Facebook contact information such as pictures email and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list All of their current contact information is then migrated over to your phone If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different name separate entries are created and can later be linked joined together into a single entry Important This process not only synchronizes your contact information but also your status events and more 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync gt Add account Facebook for syncing 2 Log into your Facebook account e Enter your account s access Email and Password information and tap Log in 3 If prompted configure any requested optional permissions 4 Tap those contact settings you wish to syn
363. u can add text 2 Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings Undo the last action Redo the last action that was undone U Make a voice recording to add to the memo Z N Hide the secondary toolbar V__ Show the secondary toolbar Add an additional page to the memo 3 Press to access the following options Note Depending on whether you have saved the memo are in keypad mode or in handwriting mode the options will appear differently The following is a list of the options you may see e Rename allows you to change the current memo title Applications and Development 227 228 e Share via allows you to share your memo using Group Cast ChatON Dropbox Flipboard Picasa Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging Gmail or Email e Handwriting to text allows you to transcribe handwriting into text e Export allows you to save the memo to your Gallery or as a PDF e Sync allows you to sync the current memo with either Google Docs or Evernote e Save as allows you to save the memo with a different name e Add picture allows you to add an image to the current memo Choose from Picture Take picture Clip Art Clipboard or Map e Add tag allows you to set tags to add in searches e Add as favorite allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite e Change background allows you to set the background for your memo Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a background and then tap Do
364. u displays at the bottom of the screen 2 Tap an available on screen option Sub Menu items Using Context Menus Context menus also called pop up menus contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen They function similarly to menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer m Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu Context Menu Accessing Recently Used Applications 1 Press and hold to open the recently used applications window Note This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager 2 Apop up displays the six most recently used applications 3 Tap an icon to open the recent application Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail Understanding Your Device 5 7 You can customize your Home screen by doing the following To delete a screen e Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens 1 Press gt 5 e Assigning a New Home screen and then tap Edit page e Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts 2 Touch and hold then e Sharing Application Information drag the undesired e Managing Shortcuts screen down to the e Adding and Removing Widgets pane Ml k 3 Press fy to return to e C
365. ubject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the device was purchased c the device model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the device box ii on the device information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the device and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license 16 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal the o
366. ugh the list You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list Touch the contact entry Tabs Search Contacts field Contacts Create Contacts Tabbed Navigation From the Home screen tap p Tap a contact name from the list and tap Edit Press and tap Edit Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main Contacts list and then tap Edit __ Context Menu Contacts 107 3 Edit the contact information then e Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or e Jap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap py 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen 3 Tap a phone number field and enter a phone e Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number ETA 108 Contact Details Screen Enter additional information such as Email Address Events Groups Ringtone Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname Website Internet call or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry _ or Tap Cancel to delet
367. ure the Require Pattern field is activated 1 296 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Pattern Read the instructions then tap Next Review the on screen animation procedure for drawing a pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle When you have connected at least four dots ina vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and tap OK Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary This process is similar to changing your password from time to time 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security and lock screen Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen
368. urrently being used and allow you to Clear Memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage USB storage and external SD card e Help provides additional battery saving techniques Shutting Down an Currently Active Application 1 Press and hold Home then tap Task manager 2 From the Active applications tab tap End to close selected applications or Tap End all to close all background running applications Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your device It also describes the device s keys screen and the icons that display when the device is in use Features of Your Device Your device is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant features The following list outlines a few of the features included in your device e Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboard High Speed Packet Access Plus HSPA delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology e 4 8 HD Super AMOLED screen 1280x720 e Android v 4 0 Ice Cream Sandwich Platform e TecTile compliant Support for Gestures Screen Shot Quick pause Quick Rotate Tap to Top of List Missed Event Alert and Camera Quick Access Wi Fi Capability USB Tethering capable Over 450 000 Apps available to download from the Google Play Store AllShare Play to share your media content across DLNA cert
369. ut mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose from GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient e Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages e Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming e Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message Push message settings e Push message allows you to receive push messages from the network e Service loading allows you to set the type of service loading notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings e Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your Status bar e Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications e Vibrate allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts Cho
370. vide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Display gt Display battery percentage For more information refer to Display Settings on page 285 Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time e Turn Bluetooth off when not in use e Turn Wi Fi off when not in use e Deactivate the GPS when not needed Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery e Turn off Automatic application sync Use the Power Savings Widget to deactivate hardware functions such as Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Synchronization or LCD brightness setting Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources Getting Started 15 Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications Use the Task Manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your dev
371. view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt 37 2 Press gt Settings o 3 Tap Week view and select a type Timeline or Analog 4 Tap First day of week and select either Local default Saturday Sunday or Monday 5 Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selection 6 Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field 260 10 11 12 13 14 15 Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the side of the week entries Tap Calendars and select the type of general synchronization settings you want A check mark indicates selection Tap Set alerts amp notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time frame for event reminders Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to vibrate Tap Notifications while screen is off to display notifications on the full screen while it is turned off Tap Sync events tasks to select those calendar events and task to sync based on current accounts Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events are displayed when swiped C
372. viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected video Image viewer options are described in the following section The last video youtook will be displayed as athumbnail inthe Image viewer icon Camcorder button shoots or stops video recording when pressed in Camcorder mode Live Shooting takes a photo during a video recording session in Camcorder mode Note This feature is not functional when the Anti Shake feature is activated Multimedia 167 Camcorder Mode allows you to shoot video Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder mode Storage location Charge Status indicates the current storage location Phone or Card and the charge state of the device i Accessing Videos When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera folder You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder 1 From the Home screen tap EHC Apps gt PA Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback or Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video indicated by a colored border and display the following video menu context options 168 e Share via lt allows you to share the video via ChatON Dropbox Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging YouTube Gmail or Email o Delete ful allows you to delete the current video Choose either OK or Cancel e More p
373. w your current battery level Displays when TTY device has been inserted TTY For more details on configuring your phone s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 264 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages calendar events call status etc You can expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen 1 2 Tap a notification entry to open the associated application 2 Clearing Notifications 1 In a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel Accessing Additional Screen Functions In addition to notifications this screen also provides quick and ready access to separate device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated by toggling them on or off ij ih po The following functions can either be activated green or deactivated gray Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Sound Vibrate Mute Screen rotation Power saving Airplane mode Driving mode or Sync Understanding Your Device 37 Function Keys Your device comes equipped with three main function keys that can be used on any screen Ho
374. where you can use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality 1 From the Home screen tap m Mobile HotSpot 2 Activate the desired connection method Apps gt For more information see either USB Tethering on page 256 or Mobile HotSpot on page 257 218 More Services Provides access to additional Samsung Apps and services Works in conjunction with the Samsung Apps feature 1 From the Home screen tap FEY Apps gt AA More Services 2 Follow the on screen instructions Music Hub Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music manager and lets you access buy and download millions of music tracks m From the Home screen tap H Apps gt Q Music Hub For more information refer to Music Hub on page 188 Music Player This application allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Music Player For more information refer to Music Player on page 184 My files This application allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap HH Applications gt My files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subf
375. wing Photo editor controls to edit your picture e Undo move to previous photo project Redo move to next photo project Resize allows you to resize the current image Rotate allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directions You can also mirror image a photo oa A E Multimedia 169 Crop allows you to crop cut out an area of a photo Color allows you to adjust the Original Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Adjust RGB Temperature Exposure Hue Darken or Lighten Effect allows you to add various effects to your photo Decoration allows you to placed Frames Stickers or Multi grids on your image If you select Drawing you can also use the Pen and Eraser tools Press to access the following options e Select image selects an existing image from your Gallery and starts a new Photo editor project Be sure and save the photo you are working on before starting a new project e Take picture launches the camera and allows you to take a new picture to then use as a new Photo editor project e Save saves your photo to your gallery e Share via allows you to share your photo via Bluetooth ChatON Dropbox Email Flipboard Gmail Google Group Cast Messaging Picasa S Memo or Wi Fi Direct e Setas sets the new image as either your Contact photo Home and lock screens Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back vid
376. with less light or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots Metering allows you to sethow the camera measures or meters the light source Centre weighted Spot or Matrix Anti Shake compensates for camera movement Auto contrast provides a clear image even under backlight circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary excessively Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Image quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal GPS tag allows you to turn GPS On or Off also known as Geotagging The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture Only available in Camera mode Multimedia 153 E 7 Settings continued Shutter sound allows you to set the Shutter sound to On or Off Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Camera button takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode 154 Camera Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the butto
377. wnloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling Third party Applications Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired application 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to uninstall the application 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the application then tap OK Running Services The Running services option allows you to view and control currently running services such as Backup Google Talk SNS messaging Swype and more 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap the Running tab to view all currently active and running applications This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications 3 Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you start the process or application again 4 Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application Storage Used
378. xting 70 Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else multi task such as access the Contacts list view a recent email locate a picture etc m In Call Notification E a Ending a Call m Briefly tap key to end the call Note To redial a recent number tap Asa at the end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap Call Ending a Call from the Status Bar Making Emergency Calls 1 From an active call you can launch a separate If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn application or return to the Home screen The current on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message call is kept active in the background displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and the SIM card then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call 2 Enter 9 1 1 and tap ECI Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the S
379. y not display properly Remove the check mark to disable this function e Enable plug ins Allows the download of plug ins such as Adobe Flash e Default storage Sets the default storage to Memory card e Website settings View advanced settings for individual websites e Default zoom Adjusts the zoom feature Set to Far Medium or Close e Open pages in overview Displays an overview of recently viewed web pages e Auto fit pages Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible e Block pop ups Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the check mark to disable this function e Text encoding Adjusts the current text encoding e Reset to default Clears all browser data and resets all settings to default Bandwidth Management e Preload search results Allows the browser to preload high confidence search results in the background If the device can accurately guess your in progress search it will preempt you by beginning to load the matching Web page before you complete the search request e Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website Labs e Quick controls allows you to enable on screen quick controls via the use of Swype thumb actions e Full screen Allows Web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short range communications technology t
380. you to exchange images music and data between SD compatible devices This section addresses the features and options of your device s SD functionality The device has a USB SD card mode microSD card storage up to 2GB in size SDHC card storage up to 64GB in size Using the SD Card There are several methods for using the SD card 1 Connecting to your PC to store files Such as music videos or other types of files and media 2 To activate the camera video music player and other dependant media or applications Important Your device can support SDHC cards up to 64GB capacity SD card Overview After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your computer to access and manage the SD card Important If access to the external SD card is not available download and install the USB drivers microSD Icon Indicators The following icons show your microSD card connection status at a glance e the card can now safely be removed e the card is being prepared for use and for mounting A e the card has been improperly removed Memory Card 65 Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files Doing so will result in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD card Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos
381. your device 12 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description scree and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Back up and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 309 13 When prompted with the Dropbox activation screen you can choose to either Create a new dropbox account already have an account Disclaimer or tap No thanks to continue Note For more information refer to Dropbox on page 207 14 Go through the on screen tutorial Switching the Device On or Off Once the device has been configured you will not be prompted with setup screens again 1 Press and hold G s Power End until the device switches on The device searches for your network and after finding it you can make or receive calls Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language and Input Settings on page 302 2 Press and hold G s Power End until the Device options screen appears 3 Tap Power off gt 0K Getting Started 17 Restarting the Device 1 Press and hold Gp Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Restart X5 gt OK Locking
382. your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website m From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap Go Note This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget The web2go screen can not be accessed via a Wi Fi connection Search the Internet To perform an Internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap from the list of search results that are displayed 3 Tapa link to view the website Connections 239 Adding and Deleting Windows You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time To add a new window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt New window 2 Anew browser window displays Note The number of currently open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Windows screen 3 Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window To delete an existing window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate your target window 3 Tap S next to the listing to delete the window 240 Going Incognito The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing Pages viewed in this incognito window won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces su
383. ys when there is a system error or alert Displays when acallisin progress Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when a call is on hold Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth headset Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when you have missed an incoming call Understanding Your Device 31 Mee 100 ED ALB 32 Displays when you device is set to automatically reject calls from your Reject list or all calls Displays when the speakerphone is on Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when the microphone is muted Icon is displayed in the Status bar area Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized For more information referto Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 280 Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged and the Display battery percentage option is enabled within the Settings gt Display menu Displays your battery is currently charging Displays your current battery charge level is low Charge 28 15 N WH WwW See ELEGE amp Displays your current battery charge level is very low Charge 15 5 Shows your current battery only has up to 4 power remaining and will soon shutdown Charge 4 1

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

PortaBilling: User Manual  UNITELNews_48  Formal Report - PROJ354 Home  Mise en page 1  Document PDF  【JL23012】UNLIMITED スピードリミッターカットユニット - J  取扱説明書 - 瀧住電機工業株式会社    MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file